2010 Chevrolet Silverado Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Seats and Restraint System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Driving Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Service and Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Features and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès du concessionnaire ou à l'adresse suivante:
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
names SILVERADO and Z71 are registered trademarks
of General Motors.
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle either because they are options
that you did not purchase or due to changes
subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please
refer to the purchase documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on
your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name “General Motors of Canada
Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
appears in this manual.
Numéro de poste 6438 de langue française
www.helminc.com
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list
of what is in the manual and the page number where it
can be found.
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, refer
to the DURAMAX® Diesel supplement for additional and
specific information on this engine.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 25854757 B Second Printing
©2009 General Motors. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this,” or
“Do not let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
Warning messages found on vehicle labels and in this
manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk
which will result in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result
in injury or death.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information relating
to a specific component, control, message, gauge,
or indicator.
WARNING:
{
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
Notice: This means there is something that could
result in property or vehicle damage. This would not
be covered by the vehicle's warranty.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gauge
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1 In Brief
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Universal Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version) . . . . . . . . 1-2
Instrument Panel (Premium Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Sensing System for Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Throttle and Brake Pedal Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version)
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑28.
P. Horn on page 4‑3.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
Q. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑143
(If Equipped).
C. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑49.
R. Automatic Transfer Case Control (If Equipped).
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3.
E. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑29.
S. Ashtray (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑18.
T. StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
F. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3‑28. Tow/Haul Selector Button
(If Equipped). See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑34
Range Selection Mode (Allison Transmission and
Hydra-Matic® 6‐Speed Button (If Equipped). See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
.
page 3‑60 (If Equipped). Pedal Adjust Button
(If Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle and Brake
Pedal on page 3‑26. Heated Windshield Washer
Fluid Button (If Equipped). Windshield Washer on
G. Audio System(s) on page 4‑82.
page 4‑6
.
H. Instrument Panel Storage on page 3‑76.
U. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑17.
I. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped).
V. Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning) on
page 4‑18 or Climate Control System (With Heater
Only) on page 4‑21 and Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 4‑22.
See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
J. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10.
K. Hood Release on page 6‑15.
L. Parking Brake on page 3‑50.
W. Power Take Off (PTO) Control (If Equipped). See
Power Take Off (PTO) in the Duramax Diesel
Supplement Index.
M. Dome Lamp Override on page 4‑15. Dome Lamps
on page 4‑14. Fog Lamps on page 4‑13
(If Equipped).
X. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped). See
Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82.
N. Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
O. Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
Y. Glove Box on page 3‑75.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel (Premium Version)
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4‑28.
O. Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
P. Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4‑4.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4‑29.
Q. Horn on page 4‑3.
D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4‑3
E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation
on page 3‑28
.
R. Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑143.
S. Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning) on
page 4‑18 or Climate Control System (With Heater
Only) on page 4‑21 or Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 4‑22 (If Equipped).
.
F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑34 (If Equipped).
G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
T. Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑17
Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 4‑18
.
Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑49.
H. Audio System(s) on page 4‑82.
I. Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10.
.
U. StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 (If Equipped).
Pedal Adjust Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable
Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3‑26. Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3‑60
J. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped).
See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
K. Dome Lamp Override on page 4‑15. Dome Lamps
(If Equipped). Heated Windshield Washer Fluid
Button (If Equipped). See Windshield Washer on
on page 4‑14
.
L. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped).
page 4‑6
.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36.
V. Passenger Airbag Off Control (If Equipped). See
M. Hood Release on page 6‑15.
N. Parking Brake on page 3‑50.
Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82.
W. Glove Box on page 3‑75.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initial Drive Information
Press Q to lock all doors.
This section provides a brief overview about some of
the important features that may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized.
Press L and release to locate the vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer to each of the
features which can be found later in this owner manual.
Press L and hold for more than two seconds to sound
the panic alarm.
Press L again to cancel the panic alarm.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and
unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from
the vehicle.
See Keys on page 3‑3 and Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4.
Remote Vehicle Start
With this feature the engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
Press K to unlock the
driver door. Press K
again within
Starting the Vehicle
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press Q.
three seconds to unlock
all remaining doors.
3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and
hold / until the turn signal lamps flash.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate control system may
come on.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat
the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start
can be extended only once.
Power Door Locks
If available, these switches are located on the front
doors.
Canceling a Remote Start
K : Press to unlock the doors.
To cancel a remote start:
Q : Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock
.
the doors.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
and hold / until the parking lamps turn off.
For more information, see:
.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on
page 3‑10
.
.
Turn the ignition on and then back off.
.
Rear Door Security Locks on page 3‑10.
See Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7.
Windows
Door Locks
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or
lower the manual windows.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
From outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver door. From inside,
use the power door locks or the manual door locks. To
lock or unlock the door with the manual locks, push
down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
Power Sliding Rear Window
If available, the power
window switches are
located on each of the
side doors in the front and
rear, if equipped.
On vehicles with a power
sliding rear window, the
switch is located in the
overhead console.
The power sliding rear window cannot be operated
manually. Push or pull the switch to open or close the
window.
Crew Cab Shown
The driver door has a switch for the passenger window
and rear windows as well.
Press the switch to lower the window. Pull the switch up
to raise it.
For more information, see:
.
Windows on page 3‑14.
.
Power Windows on page 3‑15.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Seats
Seat Adjustment
Front Seats
Manual Seats
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
If equipped, the power seat controls are located on the
outboard side of the front seats.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front or rear part of the cushion by
moving the front or rear part of the control up or down.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
See Manual Seats on page 2‑4.
See Power Seats on page 2‑5.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Power Lumbar
If equipped, this control is
located on the outboard
side of the seat.
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward.
If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
On vehicles with two-way lumbar, press and hold the
top of the control to increase lumbar support. To
decrease, press and hold the bottom of the control.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with four-way lumbar, press and hold the
front of the control to increase lumbar support. To
decrease, press and hold the rear of the control. To
raise the height of the support, press and hold the top of
the control. To lower, press and hold the bottom of the
control.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
See Power Lumbar on page 2‑7.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑10.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
Power Reclining Seatbacks
If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
If available, this control is located on the outboard side
of the seat.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
Heated Seats
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
located on the driver and passenger doors.
To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control
forward.
I : Press to heat the seatback only.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑10.
J : Press to heat the seat and seatback.
Memory Features
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to
turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will show
the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
This vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on the
driver door, and are used
to program and recall
memory settings for the
driver seat, outside
See Heated Seats on page 2‑8.
mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal feature.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants
are installed and adjusted properly.
For more information see Head Restraints on
page 2‑3
.
For more information, see Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 2‑8.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag
The passenger sensing system, if equipped, turns off
the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags, seat‐mounted side
impact airbags and roof‐rail airbags are not affected
by this.
If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger position
unless there is an airbag off switch located in the
glove box.
Refer to the following sections for important information
on how to use safety belts properly.
.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2‑16.
.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2‑21.
.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑30.
.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑49
.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not
have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 2‑82 for more information.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors and
foldaway mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door.
United States
Canada
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑86 for
important information.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to adjust the mirror.
3. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Foldaway Mirrors
Interior Mirror
To fold the mirrors:
Vehicles with a manual rearview mirror can be adjusted
to see clearly behind the vehicle. Hold the mirror in the
center to move it up or down and side to side. To
reduce headlamp glare during nighttime use, push the
tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
Vehicles with the automatic dimming feature will
automatically reduce the glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. The dimming feature comes on and the
indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is
started.
Vehicles with manual outside mirrors can be adjusted
for a clearer view.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted
for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually
pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer. See Outside Towing Mirrors on
See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3‑56
for more information.
page 3‑57
.
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Throttle and Brake Pedal Adjustment
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the
instrument panel below the climate control system.
To adjust the steering wheel:
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
See Tilt Wheel on page 4‑3.
See Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3‑26.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reading Lamps
Interior Lighting
For vehicles with reading lamps in the overhead
console, press the button located next to the lamp to
turn it on or off.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
For more information about interior lamps, see:
.
Dome Lamps on page 4‑14.
.
Reading Lamps on page 4‑15.
.
Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4‑14.
k : The dome lamp override button is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off
when a door is opened. Press the button again to return
it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come
on when a door is opened.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For more information, see:
Exterior Lighting
.
Exterior Lamps on page 4‑10.
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the
.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 4‑12.
.
Fog Lamps on page 4‑13.
left of the steering wheel.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
O : Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime
running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the
off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or
DRL back on.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
AUTO: Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking
lamps, taillamps, instrument panel lights, and license
plate lamps.
8 : Single wipe, turn to 8, then release. Several
wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
;: Turns on the parking lamps, taillamps, instrument
panel lights, and license plate lamps.
9 : Turns the windshield wipers off.
2: Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, taillamps,
instrument panel lights, and license plate lamps.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 : Turn the band up for more frequent wipes or down
for less frequent wipes.
Climate Controls
These systems control the heating, cooling, and
ventilation.
6 : Slow wipes.
? : Fast wipes.
Climate Control System (With Air
Conditioning)
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle at the top of the
lever to spray washer fluid on the windshield.
See Windshield Wipers on page 4‑6 and Windshield
Washer on page 4‑6.
A. Fan Control
E. Outside Air
B. Temperature Control
F. Air Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window
Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Control System (With Heater Only)
Dual Automatic Climate Control System
A. Fan Control
A. Driver and Passenger G. Air Delivery Mode
Temperature Controls
B. Fan Control
C. AUTO
Control
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
H. Display
I. Power Button
J. Rear Window Defogger
K. Air Conditioning
L. PASS (Passenger)
D. Defrost
E. Air Recirculation
F. Outside Air
See Climate Control System (With Air Conditioning) on
page 4‑18 or Climate Control System (With Heater
Only) on page 4‑21 and Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 4‑22.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering
column shift lever, to select the desired range of gears
for current driving conditions. See Automatic
Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
Transmission
Range Selection Mode
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑34.
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can send the
engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction.
Transfer Case Buttons
The vehicle will have one of these three styles of
transfer case controls. Use these controls to shift into
and out of the different Four-Wheel Drive modes.
The Range Selection Mode switch is located on the
shift lever. To enable the Range Selection feature, move
the column shift lever to the M (Manual) position. The
current range will appear next to the M. This is the
highest attainable range with all lower gears accessible.
As an example, when 4 (Fourth) gear is selected,
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are available.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Transfer Case
Electronic Transfer Case
This transfer case knob is located next to the steering
column.
This transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right
of the driver.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transfer Case
4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the Four-Wheel-Drive High
position when extra traction is needed, such as on
snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations.
N (Neutral): Shift the transfer case to Neutral only when
towing the vehicle. See Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 5‑44 or Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting sends
maximum power to all four wheels. You might choose
Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you are driving off-road in
deep sand, deep mud, deep snow, and while climbing
or descending steep hills.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36.
This transfer case knob is located next to the steering
column.
Each transfer case design offers different drive options.
The list below described the different drive options that
may be available.
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are
variable.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 : Press to display additional text information related to
the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA
song. If information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or
WMA playback, the song title information displays on
the top line of the display and artist information displays
on the bottom line. When information is not available,
“NO INFO” displays.
Vehicle Features
Radio(s)
For more information about these and other radio
features, see Radio(s) on page 4‑85.
For vehicles with a Rear Seat Entertainment System
(RSE) and Rear Seat Audio System (RSA) see, Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑132 and
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑141 for more
information.
Storing a Favorite Station
A maximum of 36 stations can be stored as favorites
using the six softkeys located below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the radio FAV button.
Press FAV to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM stations.
Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port
O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
BAND: Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM™,
if equipped.
For more information, see Radio(s) on page 4‑85.
f : Select radio stations.
© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A fee is required to receive the XM service.
For more information, refer to:
Setting the Clock
To set the time and date for the radio with CD, DVD,
and USB Port:
.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.)
.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 (Canada)
RUN, then press O, to turn the radio on.
See “XM Satellite Radio Service” under Radio(s) on
page 4‑85
.
2. Press H to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour,
minute, month, day, and year).
Portable Audio Devices
3. Press the softkey located under any one of the
labels to be changed.
This vehicle may have an auxiliary input located on the
radio faceplate and a USB port located in the center
console or the dashboard. External devices such as
iPod®, laptop computers, MP3 players, CD changers,
USB storage device, etc. can be connected to the
auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input cable or the
USB port depending on the audio system.
4. To increase or decrease the time or date, turn f
clockwise or counter‐clockwise.
For detailed instructions on setting the clock for the
vehicle's specific audio system, see Setting the Clock
on page 4‑82
.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” and “Using the
USB Port” under Radio(s) on page 4‑85.
Satellite Radio
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM satellite radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
¨ : Press to seek the next radio station, the next track
or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot, or to
select tracks and folders on an iPod® or USB device.
Steering Wheel Controls
For vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls,
some audio controls can
be adjusted at the
For more information, see Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 4‑143.
steering wheel.
Bluetooth®
For vehicles with an in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it
allows users with a Bluetooth enabled cell phone to
make and receive hands-free calls using the vehicle’s
audio system and controls.
The Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it can be used in
the vehicle. Not all phones will support all functions. For
more information visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.
w / x : Press to change favorite radio stations, select
tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or folders on
an iPod® or USB device.
For more information, see Bluetooth® on page 4‑121.
Navigation System
b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer
than two seconds to interact with OnStar® or Bluetooth
systems, if equipped.
The vehicle's navigation system provides detailed maps
of most major freeways and roads throughout the
United States and Canada. After a destination has been
set, the system provides turn-by-turn instructions for
reaching the destination. In addition, the system can
help locate a variety of points of interest (POI), such as
banks, airports, restaurants, and more.
+ e − e : Increases or decreases volume.
c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call.
SRCE: Press to switch between the radio, CD, and for
vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
See the vehicle's Navigation System manual for more
information.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, engine hours, Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, compass zone
setting, and compass recalibration.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems and enables access to the
personalization menu.
U : Press this button to customize the feature settings
on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons) on page 4‑73 for more information.
The DIC buttons are
located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering
wheel.
V : Press this button to set or reset certain functions
and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the DIC.
For more information, see Driver Information Center
(DIC) on page 4‑49.
Some vehicles do not
have the buttons shown,
however some of the
menus can be viewed by
using the trip odometer
reset stem.
Vehicle Customization
Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the
DIC buttons next to the steering wheel. These features
include:
.
Language
.
Door Lock and Unlock Settings
.
3 : Press this button to display the odometer, trip
odometer, fuel range, average economy, fuel used,
timer, and transmission temperature. The compass and
outside air temperature will also be shown in the
display. The temperature will be shown in °F or °C
depending on the units selected.
RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback
.
Lighting
.
Chime Volume
.
.
.
Memory Features
Remote Start
T : Press this button to display the oil life, units, tire
pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), trailer brake gain and output
Digital Speedometer Display
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7.
.
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
Cruise Control
The rear vision camera displays a view of the area
behind the vehicle when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse) on the inside rear view mirror or the
navigation screen, if equipped.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
To clean the camera lens, located in the bezel for the
tailgate handle, rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft
cloth.
For more information, see Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
on page 3‑63
.
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
This feature uses sensors on the rear bumper to detect
objects while parking the vehicle. URPA comes on
automatically when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse) and operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
(5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps to provide distance
and system information.
I : Turns the system on or off. The indicator light is
on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise
control is off.
+ RES : Press briefly to make the vehicle resume to a
previously set speed, or press and hold to accelerate.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's rear bumper clean to
ensure proper operation.
SET − : Press to set the speed and activate cruise
control or make the vehicle decelerate.
The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park
aid disable button located next to the radio.
[ : Press to disengage cruise control without erasing
the set speed from memory.
See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on
page 3‑60 for more information.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Outlets
Universal Remote System
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located below the climate control system, or may have
one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the
receptacle closest to the driver.
The Universal Home Remote System allows for garage
door openers, security systems, and home automation
devices to be programmed to work with these buttons in
the vehicle.
There may be another accessory power outlet in the
rear cargo area. If the vehicle has a floor console, there
is an accessory power outlet inside the storage bin and
one on the rear of the floor console.
See Universal Home Remote System on page 3‑69
.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even when
the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause the
vehicle's battery to run down.
See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 4‑17.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Close: Press and hold the front of the switch to close
the sunroof.
Sunroof
Extended Cab
The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can be
used to block the rays of the sun. To open the
sunshade, press and unlatch it, and roll it back. To
close, pull it forward and latch it into the closed position.
The sunroof switch is
located on the headliner
above the rearview mirror.
Crew Cab
There are two sunroof
switches located in the
overhead console above
the rearview mirror.
Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the rear
of the switch to vent the sunroof.
Open: From the vent position, press and hold the rear
of the switch to open the sunroof.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vent: From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger side switch to vent the sunroof.
Performance and Maintenance
StabiliTrak®
The vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin and the StabiliTrak system that assists
with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving
conditions. Both systems turn on automatically every
time the vehicle is started.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof,
press and hold the rear of the driver side switch until the
sunroof reaches the desired position. Press and hold
the front of the driver side switch to close it.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver
side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired
position. To express-close the sunroof, fully press and
release the front of the driver side switch. Press the
switch again to stop it.
.
To turn off traction control, press and release 5 on
the instrument panel. F illuminates and the
appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63.
The sunroof also has a sunshade that you can pull
forward to block the rays of the sun. The sunshade
must be opened and closed manually.
.
To turn off both traction control and Electronic
Stability Control, press and hold 5 until F
illuminates and the appropriate DIC message
displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
See Sunroof on page 3‑78.
page 4‑63
.
.
Press and release the button again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑6
.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire
pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire
maintenance. It is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
Tire Pressure Monitor
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS).
The Tire Pressure Monitor
alerts you when a
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑75 and
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑76.
significant reduction in
pressure occurs in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires
by illuminating the low tire
pressure warning light on
the instrument cluster.
Engine Oil Life System
The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life
based on vehicle use and, on most vehicles, displays a
DIC message when it is necessary to change the
engine oil and filter. The oil life system should be reset
to 100% only following an oil change.
If the warning light comes on, stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the tire loading information label located on
the driver side center pillar (B pillar). See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑29. The warning light will remain on
until the tire pressure is corrected.
Resetting the Oil Life System
To reset the Engine Oil Life System on most vehicles:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display.
You may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire
pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be
an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting
low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper
pressure.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset
as follows:
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within five seconds.
.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
.
Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
3. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
.
Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
.
When road and weather conditions are
appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
.
Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0), the
5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine (VIN
Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2) have a
yellow fuel cap and can use either unleaded gasoline or
ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See
Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7 and Fuel E85 (85%
Ethanol) on page 6‑9.
.
Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
.
Combine several trips into a single trip.
.
Replace the vehicle's tires with the same TPC
Spec number molded into the tire's sidewall near
the size.
.
Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roadside Assistance Program
U.S.: 1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872)
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438
OnStar®
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
As the owner of a new Chevrolet, you are automatically
enrolled in the Roadside Assistance program. This
program provides technically trained advisors who are
available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, minor repair
information or towing arrangements.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
navigation, diagnostics, and calling services.
For more information see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 8‑7
.
Automatic Crash Response
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an
OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the
vehicle to see if you need help.
If you have a current OnStar subscription, press the
OnStar button and the current GPS location will be sent
to an OnStar Advisor who will assess your problem,
contact Roadside Assistance, and relay exact location
to get you the help you need.
How OnStar Service Works
Q : This blue button connects you to a specially
trained OnStar advisor to verify your account
information and to answer questions.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a complimentary service
that includes online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner manual, special
privileges and more.
] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help
from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors.
X : Push this button for hands‐free, voice‐activated
calling and to give voice commands for turn‐by‐turn
navigation.
Sign up today at: www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crisis Assist, Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, Roadside
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation and Hands‐Free
Calling are available on most vehicles. Not all OnStar
services are available on all vehicles. For more
information see the OnStar Owner's Guide or visit
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada),
contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐466‐7827)
OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed,
or if the airbags or ACR system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding the
crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction
from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual
advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the
vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location
so they can provide services where it is located.
or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080, or press Q to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
For a full description of OnStar services and system
limitations, see the OnStar Owner's Guide in the
glove box.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
OnStar service is subject to the OnStar terms and
conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
Information.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service. Not all services are
available everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas, or at all times.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
Your Responsibility
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar hands-free calling. See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑143 for more
information.
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard.
If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system
may not be functioning properly. Press Q and request a
vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's Guide for more
information.
all services have been deactivated. Press Q to confirm
that the OnStar equipment is active.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch) . . . . . . . 2-65
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab Full
Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Rear Seat Operation (All Split Bench and Hybrid
Full Bench) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Cab Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2 Seats and Restraint System
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . 2-92
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . 2-80
Airbag Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Restraint System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
WARNING:
{
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
WARNING:
{
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up
and down.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Power Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Driver's Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of the
seats.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle's power seat:
Manual Lumbar
.
Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
.
Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
under Reclining Seatbacks on page 2‑10.
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to
be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and
Pedals on page 2‑8 for more information.
On vehicles with this feature the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat.
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have 4–way lumbar.
Power Lumbar
.
To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
.
To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
.
To raise the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control.
.
To lower the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑8 for more
information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of your
lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
This vehicle may have 2–way lumbar.
.
To increase lumbar support, press and hold the top
of the control.
.
To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
bottom of the control.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will show
the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
Heated Seats
WARNING:
{
The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting the vehicle, press the heated seat or
seatback button again.
If you cannot feel temperature change or pain to
the skin, the seat heater may cause burns even at
low temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such a condition should use care
when using the seat heater, especially for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket,
cushion, cover or similar item. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may damage
the seat.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on the
driver's door panel, and
are used to program and
recall memory settings for
the driver's seat, outside
mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal.
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
located on the driver and passenger doors.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through the
temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is
on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable
pedal movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT
RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑73 for more information.
To save seating positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver's seatback recliner, both outside
mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a
comfortable position.
See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3‑57 and
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3‑26
for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory function at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal
switch.
Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake
pedals will have the ability to save and recall their
positions.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the
driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling, see
your dealer for service.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to
indicate that the position has been stored.
A second seating, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal
position can be programmed by repeating the above
steps and pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
P (Park). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The seat,
outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored. You
will hear a single beep.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
Reclining Seatbacks
WARNING:
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
{
With the vehicle in P (Park), the driver's seat exit
position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You
will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat will move
back approximately 8 cm (3 in). To move the seat back
further, press the exit button again until the seat is all
the way back.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will
occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See
“EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑73 for more information.
WARNING:
{
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the DIC.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑73.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seat(s).
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
Seatback Latches
The front seatbacks tilt forward to allow access to the
rear of the cab.
To tilt the seatback forward, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
WARNING:
{
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback rearward until it latches. After returning the
seatback to its upright position, push and pull on the
seatback to make sure it is locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side of
the seat behind the power seat control.
.
To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
Center Seat
.
To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The
seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage
area for the driver and passenger when the center seat
is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down.
control forward.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Pull the seat cushion up until it latches with the
seatback.
Rear Seats
3. After latching the seat cushion up, pull forward on
it to make sure it is locked.
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab
Full Bench)
To fold the seat down, do the following:
Folding the Rear Seat
To fold the seat up, do the following:
1. Push the seat cushion rearward while pulling the
release strap, located under the seat cushion. Pull
the seat cushion down until it latches.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
2. After latching the seat cushion, pull up on it to
make sure it is locked.
1. Pull up on the front of
the seat cushion while
pulling down on the
release strap, located
under the seat cushion.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Operation (All Split Bench
and Hybrid Full Bench)
WARNING:
{
Folding Rear Seat
On a vehicle with a second row 60/40 split seat either
side of the rear seat may be folded for added cargo
space.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The person wearing
the belt could be seriously injured. After raising
the rear seatback, always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still
fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and
return them to their normal stowed position before
folding a rear seat.
Make sure that nothing is on the seat.
To fold the seat, slowly pull the seat cushion up.
To return the seat to the normal seating position, slowly
pull the seat cushion down.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
WARNING:
{
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when the
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling from a
moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or
death.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should not do
with safety belts.
WARNING:
{
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
WARNING:
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑31.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And
you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on page 2‑39 or Infants
and Young Children on page 2‑42. Follow those rules
for everyone's protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the
vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder
and across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and
you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
WARNING:
{
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
If the vehicle is a regular cab, then all seating positions
in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt. If the vehicle is
a crew or extended cab, then all seating positions in the
vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center
front passenger position (if equipped), which has a lap
belt. See Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab) on
page 2‑37 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the
Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, when
using the lap-shoulder belt in a rear center seating
position of a crew-cab, tilt the latch plate and keep
pulling the safety belt until it can be buckled.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system, if equipped.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑86 for
more information.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 2‑38
.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
If the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle,
check if the correct buckle is being used.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap
belt on smaller occupants.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the
vehicle.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the adjuster
On the extended cab,
push down on the release
button (A) and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
down for the regular and
crew cabs, squeeze the
buttons (A) on the sides of
the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
Regular and Crew Cab
Extended Cab
You can move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down, without squeezing the buttons for the
regular and crew cabs, or without pushing the release
button for extended cabs, to make sure it has locked
into position.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And,
if your vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side
crash or a rollover event.
This vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. If not, they are available through your dealer.
The guides may provide added safety belt comfort for
older children who have outgrown booster seats and for
some adults. When installed and properly adjusted, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from the neck
and head.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash on page 2‑95.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide to the
shoulder belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage clip on the
interior body.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure that
the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide onto the
storage clip.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt (Crew and Extended Cab)
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This section is only for the lap belt. To learn how to
wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 2‑30
.
Your vehicle may have a center seating position. When
you sit in the center front seating position, you have a
lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
Buckle, position, and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take
the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury, do
not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until
the belt is snug.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 2‑38
.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if necessary.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer's instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
.
Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
Belt on page 2‑30 for more information. If the
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
.
Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a
position with a lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
WARNING:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
{
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2‑30.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety belts
properly.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
WARNING:
{
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will
suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a
person's arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
WARNING:
{
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its
airbag system is designed for them. Every time infants
and young children ride in vehicles, they should have
the protection provided by appropriate child restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING: (Continued)
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
WARNING:
{
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
(Continued)
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
WARNING:
{
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle's owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's weight, height, and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant's body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer's instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
WARNING:
{
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of the
infant.
A young child's hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child's body with
the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 2‑49 for more information. A child
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
WARNING:
{
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
WARNING:
{
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large enough, using
safety belts.
If a child restraint is secured in the right front passenger
seat, and the vehicle has a switch in the glove box to
manually turn off the right front passenger airbag, see
Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82 and Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With
Passenger Sensing System) on page 2‑61 or Securing
a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (With
Airbag Off Switch) on page 2‑65 or Securing a Child
Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty
Crew Cab Only) on page 2‑70 for more information,
including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system or airbag
switch has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
WARNING:
{
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the LATCH
system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always better
to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle's
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments. The
child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is
in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have a top tether are
designed for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to be
attached. In Canada, the law requires that
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and
that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is
available.
Regular Cab —
Three-Passenger
Front Seat
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Do not install a child restraint in the center front seat
position. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position on page 2‑61 for more information.
Regular Cab —
Two-Passenger Front Seat
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
For regular cab models,
there is an anchor symbol
on the covers to assist
you in locating the top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with two
lower anchors.
Crew and Extended Cab
Rear Seat
For crew and extended cab models, the rear outboard
seating positions have exposed metal lower anchors
located in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Crew Cab Shown, Extended Cab Similar
For crew and extended cab models, the top tether
anchors are the loops located near the top of the
seatback for each rear seating position. These loops
will be used to route the top tether through, as well as,
to secure the top tether in the vehicle. Be sure to use
an anchor (loop) located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint
will be placed.
Regular Cab
Do not install a child restraint in the center seat position.
See Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat
Position on page 2‑61 for more information.
For regular cab models, the top tether anchors are
located under covers on the back panel behind the
passenger seat. Remove the trim plug to access the
anchor. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same
side of the vehicle as the seating position where the
child restraint will be placed.
Be sure to read the instructions following to properly
install a child restraint using these loops.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
WARNING:
{
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor, except for the center top tether
anchors in the crew and extended cabs. Attaching
more than one child restraint to a single anchor
could cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A child or
others could be injured. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on
page 2‑48 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle's safety belts to
secure the restraint, following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety belts
to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
1.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a dual
tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint .
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or the
seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
Regular Cab Models
1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if your vehicle
has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions
and the following steps:
1.1. Pull the passenger seatback forward by
pulling the recliner handle upward to access
the top tether anchor. See Reclining
Seatbacks on page 2‑10 for additional
information.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether under
the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
1.2. Find the top tether anchor.
1.3. Remove the cover to expose the anchor.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. See Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (With Passenger Sensing System)
on page 2‑61 or Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With Airbag Off Switch)
on page 2‑65 or Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (Heavy Duty Crew Cab
Only) on page 2‑70 for instructions on installing
the child restraint using the safety belts.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor (loop), if your
vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint
instructions and the following steps:
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Crew and Extended Cab Models
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
Example — Rear Driver's Side Position
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2. When using a child restraint with a top tether
in the rear center position:
A. Route the top tether (B) through the
center loop (D), and behind the inboard
passenger side headrest or head
restraint post.
B. Attach the top tether (B) to the top tether
anchor (loop) at the rear passenger side
seating position.
2.3. When using a child restraint with a top tether
in the rear passenger position:
A. Raise the headrest or head restraint .
B. Route the top tether (B) between the
headrest or head restraint posts, through
the loop on the passenger side and
behind the inboard headrest or head
restraint post.
Example — Rear Driver's Side Position
2.1. When using a child restraint with a top tether
in the rear driver side position:
A. Raise the headrest or head restraint .
C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top tether
anchor (loop) (D) at the center rear
seating position.
B. Route the top tether (B) between the
headrest or head restraint posts, through
the loop (A), behind the inboard headrest
or head restraint post, and under the
center shoulder belt (C).
2.4. Tighten the top tether when and as the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions say.
When the top tether is tightened, the anchor
(loop) may bend. This is normal and will not
damage the vehicle.
C. Attach the top tether (B) to the top tether
anchor (loop) (D) at the center rear
seating position.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
Restraint on page 2‑48.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured in
the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 2‑49 for top tether anchor locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
For crew cab second row seatings positions, tilt the
latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑49 for
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the
top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Passenger Sensing System)
WARNING:
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑48.
{
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal
airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child
restraint in the center front seat. It is always better
to secure a child restraint in a rear seat.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See
Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑86 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑34 for
more information on this, including important safety
information.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 2‑86
for additional information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
The vehicle may have a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for how and where to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for top tether anchor locations.
Even if the passenger sensing system,
if equipped, has turned off the right front
passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe.
No one can guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
(Continued)
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system, if equipped,
has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator should light and stay lit when you
start the vehicle. See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 4‑34.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat and the
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑49 for
more information.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (With
Airbag Off Switch)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Put the Restraint on page 2‑48
.
There may be a switch in the glove box that you can
use to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag.
See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82 for more
information, including important safety information.
If the vehicle is equipped with a passenger sensing
system, and when the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑86 for more information.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the
top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front unless airbag is off.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
WARNING: (Continued)
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
Even if the airbag switch has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, no system is
fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual circumstance,
even though it is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the
vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑32 for more
information, including important safety information.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
(Continued)
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for top tether anchor locations.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
If you have no other choice but to install a
rear-facing child restraint in this seat, make sure
the airbag is off once the child restraint has been
installed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
When the airbag off switch has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in
the airbag off light should light and stay lit when
you start the vehicle. See Airbag Off Light on
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
page 4‑32
.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑49.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the
top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
If you turned the airbag off with the switch, turn on the
right front passenger airbag when you remove the child
restraint from the vehicle unless the person who will be
sitting there is a member of a passenger airbag risk
group. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. When
installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for how and where to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on
page 2‑49 for top tether anchor locations.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (Heavy
Duty Crew Cab Only)
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
Put the Restraint on page 2‑48
.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger seat. Here is why:
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
WARNING:
{
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger's airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. Always secure a
rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle's safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child restraint
instructions will show you how.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
necessary.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 2‑49 for
more information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the
top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and on
the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
.
A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
.
With seat‐mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
A seat‐mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
.
A seat‐mounted side impact airbag for the right
front passenger.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from
the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very
quickly to do their job.
.
A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver should sit as far
back as possible while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑78
.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32 for
more information.
WARNING:
{
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
Where Are the Airbags?
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on
page 2‑39 or Infants and Young Children on
page 2‑42
.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The driver airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
The right front passenger airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger's side.
If the vehicle has seat‐mounted side impact airbags for
the driver and right front passenger, they are in the side
of the seatbacks closest to the door.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If the vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest. However, they are
only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
If the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) of your
vehicle is 8,500 lb (3 855 kg) or above, the vehicle has
single stage airbags. If the GVWR is below 8,500 lb
(3 855 kg) then the vehicle has dual stage airbags. You
can find the GVWR on the certification label on the rear
edge of the driver's door. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑29 for more information.
Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and
how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
.
The vehicle may have dual‐stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
.
If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object that does not
deform.
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles with dual stage airbags also have a driver's
seat position sensor which enables the sensing system
to monitor the position of the driver seat (all models).
The seat position sensor provides information that is
used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a
reduced level or at full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat‐mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined
by the location and severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment is determined
by the direction of the roll.
The vehicle may or may not have seat‐mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on
page 2‑73. Seat‐mounted side impact and roof-rail
airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe
side crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal
impact. Seat‐mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system's
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the
airbag module.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. A seat‐mounted side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck. Both
roof-rail airbags will deploy when either side of the
vehicle is struck, or if the sensing system predicts that
the vehicle is about to roll over, or in a severe frontal
impact.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with seat‐
mounted side impact airbags, there are airbags
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag
modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating positions.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for
some time after they deploy. Some components of the
airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑79.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat‐mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant's upper body.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant's motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on
page 2‑78 for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get out
of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may
have also damaged important functions in the
vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and
steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears
to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may
be concealed damage that could make it difficult
to safely operate the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt to restart the
engine after a crash has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning
flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn off the interior
lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the
controls for those features.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
See Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy on
page 8‑17 and Event Data Recorders on
page 8‑17
.
Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Airbag Off Switch
If one of the switches pictured in the following
illustrations is located in the glove box, the vehicle has
an airbag on-off switch that you can use to manually
turn on or off the right front passenger airbag.
United States
Canada
If the vehicle does not have an airbag off switch, it may
have a passenger sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 2‑86.
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the right front passenger position is a
member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
.
My vehicle has no rear seat;
.
Although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old) must
ride in the front seat because:
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to 12
sometimes must ride in the front because no space
is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle; or
.
My vehicle has no rear seat;
.
.
The child has a medical condition which, according
My vehicle has a rear seat too small to
to the child's physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver can
constantly monitor the child's condition.
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
.
The infant has a medical condition which,
according to the infant's physician, makes it
necessary for the infant to ride in the front seat so
that the driver can constantly monitor the child's
condition.
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
.
Causes the passenger airbag to pose a special
risk for the passenger; and
.
Makes the potential harm from the passenger
airbag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the airbag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
United States
Canada
WARNING:
{
To turn off the right front passenger airbag, insert the
ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the off position.
If the right front passenger's airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there. Do not turn off the
passenger's airbag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group.
The word OFF or the off symbol will come on in the
passenger airbag status indicator located in the
overhead console to let you know that the right front
passenger airbag is off, after the system check is
completed. The airbag off light will come on and stay on
to let you know that the right front passenger's airbag is
off. See Airbag Off Light on page 4‑32.
2-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the
vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑32 for more
information, including important safety information.
United States
Canada
To turn the right front passenger airbag on again, insert
the ignition key into the switch, push in, and move the
switch to the on position.
The right front passenger frontal airbag is now enabled
(may inflate). See Airbag Off Light on page 4‑32 for
more information.
2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Sensing System
If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger position,
unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove
box. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not
have a passenger sensing system. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 2‑82 for more information.
United States
Canada
The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on
the overhead console when the vehicle is started.
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start to start the vehicle from a distance,
if equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑34.
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visors refers to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, seat‐mounted side impact airbags (if
equipped), and the roof-rail airbags (if equipped) are not
affected by the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled (may
inflate) or not.
2-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
WARNING: (Continued)
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing child
restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child seat; an
older child riding in a booster seat; and children, who
are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is
turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
WARNING:
{
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
(Continued)
2-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person's seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
.
The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
.
The system determines an infant is present in a
child restraint.
.
A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
.
Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
WARNING:
{
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will
light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4‑34.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
for more information, including important safety
information.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
2-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable,
to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not
pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
page 2‑3
.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position With Passenger Sensing
System in the Index.
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child’s seating posture and
body build. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
2-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered
on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
2-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑92 for more
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional information about the
importance of proper restraint use.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is
not desired, remove the object from the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
WARNING:
{
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper operation
of the passenger sensing system.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat covers,
seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect how well
the passenger sensing system operates. We
recommend that you not use seat covers or other
2-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual
have information about servicing the vehicle and the
airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering Information on
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change about
the vehicle that could keep the airbags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle's
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts of
the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing and
diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel,
roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, overhead console, front sensors, side
impact sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag
wiring can affect the operation of the airbag system.
page 8‑16
.
WARNING:
{
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger's
position, which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger's seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim,
or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent proper
2-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent
the passenger sensing system from properly turning
off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
System on page 2‑86.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether this
will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 8‑2.
In addition, your dealer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 6‑85 for
additional important information.
Q: What if I added a snow plow? Will it keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: We have designed our airbag systems to work
properly under a wide range of conditions, including
snow plowing with vehicles that have the optional
Snow Plow Prep Package (RPO VYU). But do not
change or defeat the snow plow's “tripping
mechanism.” If you do, it can damage your snow
plow and your vehicle, and it may cause an airbag
inflation.
2-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 4‑32 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do not
open or break the airbag coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers, have the airbag
covering and/or airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an
Airbag Inflate? on page 2‑79. See your dealer for
service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job. See your dealer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip
apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get
a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
Safety Belt Reminders on page 4‑31 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
Belts on page 6‑112
.
2-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH system
parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not
being used at the time of the crash.
WARNING:
{
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But
the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer to have the safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
2-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
2-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Active Fuel Management™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Automatic Transmission Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Doors and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Power Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Outside Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3 Features and Controls
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Storage Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Object Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) . . . . . . . . 3-60
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Universal Home Remote System Operation
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
(With Three Round LED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key is used for the ignition and all door locks.
The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer or
qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store
this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle.
See your dealer if a replacement key or additional key
is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be
sure you have spare keys.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside
Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation
on page 8‑7
.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑18 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
.
Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left
or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
.
Check the transmitter's battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
.
If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 3‑7 for additional information.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft‐deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 3‑17
.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds. The
alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to ON/RUN
when Q is pressed again within three seconds. See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73 for additional information.
or L is pressed again. The ignition must be in LOCK/
OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Pressing Q arms the content theft‐deterrent system.
See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3‑17.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on it, “1” or “2”. These
numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle. For
example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”,
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
and Pedals on page 2‑8 and DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑73 for
more information.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
If K is pressed again within three seconds, all
remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come
on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is
turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73. If enabled through the DIC, the exterior
lights may turn on. See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73
.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is programmed to
this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no
longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters
programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under
DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑56 for instructions on how to match
RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
To replace the battery:
Battery Replacement
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object,
such as a flat head screwdriver.
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63 for additional
information.
.
Carefully insert the tool into the notch located
along the parting line of the transmitter. Do not
insert the tool too far. Stop as soon as
resistance is felt.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static from
your body could damage the transmitter.
.
Twist the tool until the transmitter is separated.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of
the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle's heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 3‑4 for additional
information.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures.
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate
control system, the system will turn on at the setting the
vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures
and will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN.
If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate
control system, during remote start, you will need to
manually turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated
Seats on page 2‑8 for additional information.
2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button.
The vehicle's doors will lock. Immediately press
and hold the transmitter's remote start button until
the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the
vehicle's lights, press and hold the remote start
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote
start button again after the vehicle has started will
turn the engine off.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine
is still running, to extend the engine running time
by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key. After the key is removed from the
ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again.
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the
ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
.
Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle start
system enabled. The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START”
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73 for additional information. If your vehicle
does not have DIC buttons, see your dealer to enable
or disable the remote vehicle start system.
.
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
.
Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer to add the manufacturer's
remote vehicle start feature.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote start
buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been
running for five minutes, 10 minutes are added, allowing
the engine to run for 15 minutes.
See your dealer if you would like to add the
manufacturer's remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
WARNING: (Continued)
Door Locks
.
Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
WARNING:
{
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will
not open it. The chance of being thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors
are not locked. So, all passengers should
wear safety belts properly and the doors
should be locked whenever the vehicle is
driven.
From the outside, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the key in the driver's door.
From the inside, use the power door locks or manual
door locks. To lock or unlock the door with the manual
locks, push down or pull up on the manual lock knob.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, the switches on the front doors
can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle.
.
Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
(Continued)
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Rear Door Security Locks
The vehicle may have the delayed locking feature.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch and
a door is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the
last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal
that the delayed locking feature is in use.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
Pressing the power lock switch twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the
doors.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK
under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73
.
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle's power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑73 for more information on DIC
programming.
The rear doors must be open to access them. The label
showing lock and unlock positions is located near
the lock.
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Rear Doors
Extended Cab
Your vehicle may have a rear access door(s) that allows
easier access to the rear area of the extended cab.
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual
lock, using the power door lock switch, or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the
vehicle has one.
To open a rear access
2. Open the door from the outside.
door from the outside, first
open the front door. Then,
use the handle located on
the front edge of the rear
access door to open it.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door
is open.
If the driver's side power door lock switch is pressed
when the driver's door is open and the key is in the
ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver's
door will unlock.
You must fully close a rear access door before you can
close the front door.
If the passenger's side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger's door is open and
the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the front passenger's door will unlock.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open a rear access
door from the inside, the
front door must be
Tailgate
opened first. Then, use
the handle located on the
inside of the rear access
door to open.
WARNING:
{
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate,
even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds.
People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their
balance and fall in response to vehicle
maneuvers. Falling from a moving vehicle may
result in serious injuries or death. Do not allow
people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt
properly.
Crew Cabs
If your vehicle is a crew cab, you can open your doors
from the inside or outside. Your vehicle may also have a
feature which prevents children from opening the rear
doors. See Rear Door Security Locks on page 3‑10 for
more information.
On vehicles with a lock on the tailgate, use the key to
lock or unlock the tailgate.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, firmly push it upward until it latches.
After you put the tailgate back up, pull it back towards
you to be sure it latches securely.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. With the tailgate about halfway open, lift the right
edge of the tailgate from the lower pivot.
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate can be removed to allow for different
loading situations. Although the tailgate can be removed
without assistance, you may want someone to assist
you with the removal to avoid possible damage to the
vehicle.
On vehicles with the tailgate assist feature, raise
the tailgate nearly all the way to the closed position
prior to removing the left edge.
3. Move the tailgate to the right to release the
left edge.
On vehicles with a rear vision camera, it must be
disconnected before removing the tailgate. See Rear
Vision Camera (RVC) on page 3‑63 for more
information.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall the tailgate. Make
sure the tailgate is secure.
To remove the tailgate, do the following:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly and release
both retaining cable
clips. To release the
retaining cable clips, lift
the cable so it points
straight out. Lift the clip
over the bolt, and push
the cable forward then
rotate down.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
Manual Windows
Turn the hand crank on each door to manually raise or
lower the manual windows.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
WARNING:
{
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do
not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Crew Cab shown
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
If your vehicle has power windows, the controls are
located on each of the side doors in the front and rear
for crew cab and extended cab models.
The driver's door has a switch for the passenger's and
rear windows as well. Your power windows will work
when the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or
RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 3‑23
.
Press the switch down to lower the window, and pull up
the front of the switch to raise the window.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express Down Windows
Power Sliding Rear Window
Vehicles with the express down feature allow the driver
and front passenger windows to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press down fully on the window
switch, then release, to activate the express down
mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any
time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window
partway, press the switch to the first depression
position, until the window is at the desired position.
On vehicles with a power
sliding rear window, the
switch is located in the
overhead console.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): If your crew cab or extended
cab vehicle has power windows, the driver's door power
window switch has a lockout feature. The lockout switch
is located in front of the window switches. This feature
prevents the rear windows from operating, except from
the driver's position. Press the switch to engage or
disengage the lockout feature. An indicator light on the
switch will come on when the lockout feature is
The power sliding rear window works when the ignition
has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑23
for more information.
engaged, and will go off when disengaged.
The power sliding rear window cannot be operated
manually.
T: Push to open the window.
S: Pull to close the window.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sun Visors
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Swing the sun
visor to the side to cover the side window.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. The security light should come
on and flash.
The passenger's side sun visor may have a vanity
mirror.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the alarm
will not be activated until all doors are closed and
the security light goes off.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they
do not make it impossible to steal.
3. Close all doors. The security light will stop flashing
and go off after approximately 30 seconds. The
content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the
security light goes off.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
If a locked driver door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not placed
in the ignition and turned to START or the door is not
unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm
will go off. Your vehicle's headlamps will flash and the
horn will sound for about 30 seconds, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
This is the security light.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the power door lock
switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter. You
should also remember that you can start your vehicle
with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver's window
and open the driver's door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
RKE transmitter.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
.
If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
.
Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if the system has been armed.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses
and Circuit Breakers on page 6‑118.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and turn
it to START to turn it off.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, see your dealer for service.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem with
arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑18 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start
the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try
again.
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 6‑118. If the engine still does
not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
The system is automatically armed when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START from
the LOCK/OFF position.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to
have a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do
not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith
who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys made
and programmed to the system.
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK/
OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the
new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard
stops with new linings can mean premature
wear and earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every time you get new
brake linings.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for the trailer
towing capabilities of the vehicle and more
information.
.
Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
.
Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
Following break‐in, engine speed and load can be
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do
not make full-throttle starts. Avoid
gradually increased.
downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this
doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like
the radio and the windshield wipers operate while the
engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The switch
stays in this position when the engine is running. The
transmission is also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must
be applied.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be
drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Starting the Engine
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF and the key is in the ignition.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is
moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle
is stopped.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
.
Audio System
.
Power Windows
OnStar® System (if equipped)
.
.
Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON/
RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof continue
to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opened. The
radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the
driver door is opened.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5‐10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to 15 seconds. Wait at least
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up
and lubricate all moving parts.
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go
of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do
not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position, and then released
when the engine begins cranking, the engine will
continue cranking for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START for many seconds, cranking
will be stopped after 15 seconds to prevent
cranking motor damage. To prevent gear damage,
this system also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your dealer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To control the fast idle:
Fast Idle System
.
To Enable the Fast idle, press and release the
Fast Idle System with Switch
Cruise Control On/Off button and ensure that the
LED is lit.
If the vehicle has this
.
For the preset Fast Idle, press and release the
feature it is available only
with cruise control. The
manual fast idle switch is
operated using the cruise
control buttons located on
the left hand side of the
steering wheel.
cruise set switch. This will set the preset fast idle
speed.
.
For the variable fast idle, press and hold the
accelerator at the desired RPM, then press and
release the cruise control cruise set switch to set
the desired idle speed.
When the fast idle is active the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display “FAST IDLE ON.”
One of the following actions will turn off the fast idle:
.
Pressing the brake.
This system can be used to increase engine idle speed
whenever the following conditions are met:
.
Selecting the Cancel button.
.
.
The park brake is set.
Releasing the Parking Brake.
.
.
The brake pedal is not pressed.
The transmission shifter is moved out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral).
.
The vehicle must not be moving and the
accelerator must not be pressed.
.
Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it
was previously on.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
The vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory
Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑8 for more
information.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise
control.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the instrument panel
below the climate control
system.
Engine Coolant Heater
The engine heater can provide easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below − 18°C (0°F). Vehicles
with an engine heater should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting. An internal thermostat
in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above −18°C (0°F).
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer in the area
where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advice
on this.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is secured to the Engine Compartment Fuse
Block with a clip. Carefully remove the wire tie
which bundles the electrical plug. Do not cut the
electrical cord.
Active Fuel Management™
Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on the driving conditions.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve
better fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing,
or merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
WARNING:
{
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
If the vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑56 for more
information on using this display.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away from
moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have an
electronic shift position indicator within the instrument
panel cluster. This display comes on when the ignition
key is turned to the ON/RUN position.
Heavy Duty 6-Speed Automatic Transmission Shown
(Light Duty 6 Speed Similar)
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when starting the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill,
especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you
might notice an increase in the effort to shift out of
P (Park). See Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
under Shifting Into Park on page 3‑51 for more
information.
Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed
Automatic Transmission
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING:
{
{
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the vehicle will be
free to roll — even if the shift lever is in
P (Park) — if the transfer case is in Neutral. So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear,
Two-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive High
or Four-Wheel Drive Low — not in Neutral. See
Shifting Into Park on page 3‑51.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
Park on page 3‑51. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission, see If
Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on
page 5‑27
.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use
N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
.
Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
WARNING:
{
By doing this, the vehicle shifts down to the next
gear and has more power.
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road driving.
You might want to shift the transmission to a lower gear
selection if the transmission shifts too often.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding. See Skidding under
Loss of Control on page 5‑10.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts
the transmission shifting to the current driving
conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and
M (Manual Mode): This position is available on vehicles
with the Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission. It lets drivers select the range of gears
appropriate for current driving conditions. If the vehicle
has this feature, see Range Select Mode (Allison
Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed transmission)
later in this section.
downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to
determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is
able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such
as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load.
If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current
vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission
does not upshift and instead holds the current gear. In
some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift,
however the transmission is operating normally.
3 (Third): This position is also used for normal driving.
It reduces vehicle speed more than D (Drive) without
using the brakes. You might choose 3 (Third) instead of
D (Drive) when driving on hilly, winding roads, when
towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears
and when going down a steep hill.
The transmission uses adaptive shift controls. Adaptive
shift controls continually compares key shift parameters
to pre-programmed ideal shifts stored in the
transmissions computer. The transmission constantly
makes adjustments to improve vehicle performance
according to how the vehicle is being used, such as
with a heavy load or when temperature changes. During
this adaptive shift control process, shifting might feel
different as the transmission determines the best
settings.
2 (Second): This position reduces vehicle speed even
more than 3 (Third) without using the brakes. You can
use 2 (Second) on hills. It can help control vehicle
speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then
you would also want to use the brakes off and on.
If you manually select 2 (Second) in an automatic
transmission, the transmission will start in second gear.
You can use this feature for reducing the speed of the
rear wheels when you are trying to start the vehicle
from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
When temperatures are very cold, the Allison
Transmission® and Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission's gear shifting could be delayed providing
more stable shifts until the engine warms up. Shifts
could be more noticeable with a cold transmission. This
difference in shifting is normal.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic® 4-Speed transmission
this position reduces vehicle speed even more than
2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it on
very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift
lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Range Selection Mode (Allison® or
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Transmission)
For an Allison Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
transmission, this position reduces vehicle speed
without using the brakes. You can use it for major/
severe downgrades and off-road driving where the
vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of
grade. When you shift to 1 (First) it provides the lowest
gear appropriate to current road speed and continues to
downshift as the vehicle slows, eventually downshifting
to 1 (First) gear.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The vehicle may have a Range Selection Mode. The
Range Selection Mode helps control the vehicle's
transmission and vehicle speed while driving down hill
or towing a trailer by letting you select a desired range
of gears.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use this feature, do the following:
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. The repair will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the
steering column shift lever, to select the desired
range of gears for current driving conditions.
When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays
next to the M, indicating the current gear.
Low Traction Mode
If your vehicle has the Allison Transmission®, or the
Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission, it has a
Low Traction Mode that can assist in vehicle
This number is the highest gear that can be used.
However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower
gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means
that all gears below that number are available. When
5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot
be used until the plus/minus button located on the
steering column lever is used to change to the gear.
acceleration when road conditions are slippery, such as
with ice or snow. While the vehicle is at a stop, select
the second gear range using Range Selection Mode.
This will limit torque to the wheels after it detects wheel
slip, preventing the tires from spinning.
Grade Braking is not available when Range Selection
Mode is active. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑34.
While using Range Selection Mode, cruise control and
the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also see Tow Haul Mode under Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑51 for more information.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul Mode (Allison Transmission®
or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
Vehicles with an automatic transmission have a tow/
haul mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission
shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased
performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling
when towing or hauling heavy loads.
Vehicles with an Allison or Hydra-Matic® 6-speed
automatic transmission® have a tow/haul mode. The
tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to
reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance,
vehicle control, and transmission cooling when towing
or hauling heavy loads.
The selector button is located on the end of the shift
lever. Turn the tow/haul on and off by pressing the
button. When the tow/haul is on, a light on the
instrument panel cluster will come on.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 4‑47 for more
information.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the tow/haul mode on and off by pressing the
button, located on the end of the shift lever. When the
tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on.
acceleration, engine torque and brake pedal usage.
Using this information, it detects when the truck is on a
downhill grade and the driver desires to slow the vehicle
by pressing the brake.
See Tow/Haul Mode Light on page 4‑47 for more
Also see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more
information.
information.
Also see “Tow Haul Mode” under Towing a Trailer on
page 5‑51 for more information.
Cruise Grade Braking (Allison
Transmission® or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission)
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission®
or Hydra-Matic® 6-Speed Automatic
Transmission)
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by
pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever.
While in Range Selection Mode , Grade Braking is
deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range
of gears.
Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a
downhill grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses
the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle.
Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise Control is
engaged in Tow/Haul mode to assist in maintaining
vehicle speed under loaded vehicle conditions.
It utilizes vehicle acceleration and deviation from
desired speed to determine the correct gear for the
operating condition. If vehicle speed is above the
desired speed the transmission will downshift to slow
the vehicle. If vehicle speed is near or below desired
speed the trans will upshift, allowing vehicle speed to
increase.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode
is selected and you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑28 for
more information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade
Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds
when driving on downhill grades by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine
and transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear
on the braking system and increases control of the
vehicle. Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed,
While in the Range Select Mode (RSM) mode, cruise
grade braking is not available.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 3‑28.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive, you can send the
engine's driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of Four-Wheel
Drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
following before using Four-Wheel Drive. See the
appropriate text for the transfer case in the vehicle.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel Drive High or Four-Wheel Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle's powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience vibration in the steering
system.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
The transfer case shift lever is on the floor to the right of
the driver. Use this lever to shift into and out of
Four-Wheel Drive.
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
Front Axle
The front axle engages and disengages automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the
axle to engage or disengage is normal.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
four-wheel drive for an extended period of time can
cause premature wear on the vehicle's powertrain.
Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel
Drive for extended periods of time.
A Four-Wheel Drive
indicator light comes on
when you shift into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages. See
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also engages
the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never
need Four-Wheel-Drive Low. It sends maximum power
to all four wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive
Low if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud,
deep snow, and while climbing or descending steep
hills.
on page 4‑47
.
Some delay between shifting and when the indicator
light comes on is normal.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
2m
4m
4n
N
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
Normal
Severe
YES
YES
Extreme
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑44 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑44
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N (Neutral): Shift to this setting only when the vehicle
needs to be towed. See Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 5‑44 or Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑44.
A parking brake symbol is
located next to the
N (Neutral) symbol as a
reminder to set the
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The front
axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
parking brake before
shifting the transfer case
into N (Neutral).
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use this setting when
you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads
or in most off-road situations. This setting also engages
the front axle to help drive your vehicle. This is the best
setting to use when plowing snow.
You can shift from Two-Wheel-Drive High to
WARNING:
{
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive High to
Two-Wheel-Drive High while the vehicle is moving. In
extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to stop or
slow the vehicle to shift into Four-Wheel-Drive High.
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in Neutral. See Parking
Brake on page 3‑50.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Using the Manual Transfer Case
Shifting from Two-Wheel-Drive High to
Four-Wheel-Drive High
.
Shifting should be made using quick motions.
.
Shifting slowly may make it more difficult to shift.
Shifts between Two-Wheel-Drive High and
.
Four-Wheel-Drive High can be made at any vehicle
speed.
You may notice that it is harder to shift when the
vehicle is cold. After the vehicle warms up the
shifting will return to normal.
.
Shift the transfer case lever in one continuous
motion into either the Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
.
While in Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel-Drive
Low you may experience reduced fuel economy.
.
.
In extremely cold weather, it may be necessary to
Avoid driving in Four-Wheel Drive on clean, dry
slow or stop the vehicle to shift into
Four-Wheel-Drive High until the vehicle has
warmed up.
pavement. It may cause your tires to wear faster,
make the transfer case harder to shift, and run
noisier.
.
.
While in Four-Wheel-Drive High, the vehicle can be
driven at any posted legal speed limit.
If the transfer case shifter is in the N (Neutral)
position and you have difficulty reaching the
selected transfer case mode, with the engine
running, shift the transmission momentarily to drive
and then back to N (Neutral). This will realign the
gear teeth in the transfer case and allow you to
complete the shift.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low with the vehicle
at a stop may be more difficult. You may be unable
to complete the shift to Four-Wheel-Drive Low, and
the transfer case will end up in N (Neutral). This is
normal, and is a function of the gear teeth aligning
in the transfer case. When this happens, make
sure the engine is on, shift the transmission
Shifting In or Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
Notice: Shifting the transfer case into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low while moving at speeds
faster than 5 km/h (3 mph) may cause premature
wear to the transfer case, and may cause the gears
to grind. To avoid causing premature wear, and
grinding the gears, do not shift the transfer case
into Four-Wheel-Drive Low while the vehicle is
moving faster than 5 km/h (3 mph).
momentarily to D (Drive) and back to N (Neutral),
and then complete the transfer case shift.
.
.
Shift the transfer case shift lever in one continuous
motion into the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position.
Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low should be done,
if possible, with the vehicle at a slight roll, 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low do not drive faster
than 45 mph. This will reduce wear and extend the
life of your transfer case.
.
Shift the transmission into N (Neutral).
Shifting In or Out of Neutral
1. With the vehicle running and the engine at an idle
set the parking brake.
WARNING:
{
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause the
vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in Neutral. See Parking
Brake on page 3‑50.
2. Place the transmission into N (Neutral).
Shift the transfer case in one continuous motion into or
out of the N (Neutral) position.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can choose among four driving settings:
Electronic Transfer Case
Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in.
The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not
come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer for
service. An indicator light flashes while shifting the
transfer case and remains illuminated when the shift is
complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot
make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen
setting.
The transfer case knob is
located next to the
steering column.
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The front
axle is not engaged in Two-Wheel Drive. This setting
also provides the best fuel economy.
Use the dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
Recommended Transfer Case Settings
Transfer Case Settings
Driving Conditions
2m
4m
4n
N
Normal
Severe
YES
YES
Extreme
YES
Vehicle in Tow*
YES
*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑44 or
Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑44
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages the front
axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to
use when plowing snow.
WARNING:
{
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See
Parking Brake on page 3‑50.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also engages
the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never
need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four
wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low while
driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
and while climbing or descending steep hills.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑44 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 5‑44 for more information.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
If the SERVICE 4–WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
you should take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
See “Service 4–Wheel Drive message” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting
from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. See Shifting Out of
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for more information.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from transfer case N (Neutral) with the engine
running.
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed
operation in Four-Wheel-Drive Low may damage or
shorten the life of the drivetrain.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.
To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method for
shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. You must
wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission
in gear.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position when the
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel-Drive
High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light will flash
for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless
your vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in N (Neutral).
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to
Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High, the
vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the
ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting
out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the vehicle
moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, or Two-Wheel-Drive High
position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
or Two-Wheel-Drive High indicator light to stop flashing
and remain on before shifting the transmission
into gear.
Shifting into Neutral
To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and press and hold the
regular brake pedal. See Parking Brake on
page 3‑50 for more information.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel-Drive High.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
until it stops and hold it there until the Neutral light
starts blinking. This will take at least 10 seconds.
Then slowly release the dial to the four low
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from transfer case N (Neutral) with the engine
running.
position. The N (Neutral) light will come on when
the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer
case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission
to R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for one second.
3. Turn the transfer case dial to
Two-Wheel-Drive High.
After the transfer case has shifted out of
N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Shifting Out of Neutral
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
To shift the transfer case out of N (Neutral) do the
following:
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of the
different modes may cause the transfer case to enter
the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer
case from possible damage and will only allow the
transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds.
The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to
three minutes.
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transfer Case
2 m (Two-Wheel-Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The front
axle is not engaged in Two-Wheel Drive. This setting
also provides the best fuel economy.
The transfer case knob is
located next to the
steering column.
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are
variable. When driving the vehicle in AUTO, the front
axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent only to
the front and rear wheels automatically based on driving
conditions. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower
fuel economy than Two-Wheel-Drive High.
4 m (Four-Wheel-Drive High): Use the
Four-Wheel-Drive High position when extra traction is
needed, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most
off-road situations. This setting also engages the front
axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to
use when plowing snow.
Use the dial to shift into and out of Four-Wheel Drive.
You can choose among five driving settings:
Indicator lights in the dial show which setting you are in.
The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn
on the ignition and one will stay on. If the lights do not
come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer for
service. An indicator light will flash while shifting the
transfer case. It will remain illuminated when the shift is
complete. If for some reason the transfer case cannot
make a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen
setting.
4 n (Four-Wheel-Drive Low): This setting also engages
the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never
need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four
wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel-Drive Low if you
are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep
snow, and while climbing or descending steep hills.
If the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
StabiliTrak® off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
WARNING:
{
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High or AUTO
position. This can be done at any speed, except when
shifting from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. The indicator light
will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is
completed.
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See
Parking Brake on page 3‑50.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel-Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel-Drive High position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting
from Four-Wheel-Drive Low. The indicator light will flash
while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is
completed.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle's transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 5‑44 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 5‑44 for more information.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel-Drive Low
If the SERVICE 4–Wheel Drive message stays on, you
should take the vehicle to your dealer for service. See
“Service 4–Wheel Drive message” under DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑63.
When Four-Wheel-Drive Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph. Extended high-speed
operation in Four-Wheel-Drive Low may damage or
shorten the life of the drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method for
shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low position. You must
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wait for the Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission
into gear.
vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the
knob to the Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or
Two-Wheel-Drive High position. You must wait for the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive
High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on
before shifting the transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) with the engine running.
It is typical for the vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel-Drive Low and Four-Wheel-Drive High
ranges or from N (Neutral) with the engine running.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the
vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the
transmission is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the
transfer case will shift to Four-Wheel-Drive High mode.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel-Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel-Drive High switch position
when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive
High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in
N (Neutral).
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel-Drive Low to
Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel-Drive
High, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and
the ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred method for
shifting out of Four-Wheel-Drive Low is to have the
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).
Shifting into Neutral
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal. See Parking Brake on page 3‑50 for more
information.
Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift out of N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
3. Shifting the transfer case into N (Neutral) can be
done with or without the engine running. Shifting
without the engine running should be done with the
ignition in ON/RUN.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Turn the transfer case dial to Two-Wheel-Drive
High, Four-Wheel-Drive High, AUTO.
4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
After the transfer case has shifted out of
N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral)
light starts blinking. This will take at least
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the
four low position. The N (Neutral) light will come on
when the transfer case shift to N (Neutral) is
complete.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the requested mode indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for the
mode indicator lights to stop flashing before
shifting the transmission into gear.
7. If the engine is running, make sure that the transfer
case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission
to R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for one second.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to the
desired position.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light on
Parking Brake
page 4‑37
.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push down momentarily on the
parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release.
Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the
parking brake is not released when you begin to drive,
the brake system warning light will flash and a chime
will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
Set the parking brake by holding the regular brake
pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake
pedal.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
Shifting Into Park
WARNING:
{
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in N (Neutral).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in
N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if
the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your hand,
the vehicle is in P (Park).
N (Neutral). If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing
a Trailer on page 5‑51.
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
See Parking Brake on page 3‑50 for more
information.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If you
can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift
into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into Park on page 3‑51.
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case
is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll,
even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You
or others could be injured. Do not leave the
vehicle with the engine running unless you
have to.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of
P (Park).
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
.
Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into P (Park).
.
Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced soon.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
Parking Over Things That Burn
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
See Jump Starting on page 6‑44 for more information.
WARNING:
{
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
.
There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
.
The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
.
Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
.
The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
.
The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
.
The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
WARNING: (Continued)
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
WARNING:
{
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or
smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area
that has no fresh air ventilation. For more
WARNING:
{
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case in
N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the automatic transmission shift lever is in
P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in N (Neutral). Always set the
parking brake.
information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3‑54.
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
move. See Shifting Into Park on page 3‑51.
If pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
(Continued)
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Mirrors
Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates
each time the ignition is turned to start.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror
to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the
tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust the outside mirror for a clearer view.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons for the OnStar® system. See your dealer for
more information about OnStar® and how to subscribe
to it. See the OnStar® owner guide for more information
about the services OnStar® provides.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
Using hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on convex
mirror attachments could decrease mirror performance.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off.
The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera
(RVC). See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on page 3‑63
for more information.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O button may not be
available.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Towing Mirrors
Outside Power Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
power mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door.
If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted
for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually
pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to adjust the mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward. The lower
portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror's
surface is curved to see more from the driver seat. The
convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver
preferred position for better vision.
3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the
vehicle and the area behind are seen.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in
the direction of the turn or lane change.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
Vehicles with outside
power foldaway mirrors
have controls located on
the driver door.
.
The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
.
They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
.
The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
.
The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror
controls to reset them to their normal position.
A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of
the power foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after
a manual folding operation.
Automatic Dimming
The driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror on page 3‑56 for more information.
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
Turn Signal Indicator
The vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Outside Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has the memory package, the passenger
and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position when
the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the driver
view the curb when parallel parking. The mirror(s) return
to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of
R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned off or to
OFF/LOCK.
For vehicles with heated mirrors:
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors. If the vehicle has a towing mirror, only the
upper glass of the mirror is heated. The lower convex
part of the towing mirror is not heated.
Depending on the vehicle's features, see “Rear Window
Defogger” under, Climate Control System (With Air
Conditioning) on page 4‑18 or Climate Control System
(With Heater Only) on page 4‑21 or Dual Automatic
Climate Control System on page 4‑22 for more
information.
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑73 for more information.
Outside Convex Mirror
WARNING:
{
A convex mirror can make things, like other
vehicles, look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror
or glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror's surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver seat.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Object Detection Systems
WARNING:
{
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 8 km/h
(5 mph), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an
object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least
25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.
Objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too close
or far from the vehicle
.
Children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle's mirrors.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system can be
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable
button located next to the
radio.
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). A single tone sounds to
indicate the system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less than
5 mph (8 km/h).
An obstacle is indicated by audible beeps. The interval
between the beeps becomes shorter as the vehicle gets
closer to the obstacle. When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are continuous.
The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑63.
To be detected, objects must be at least 25.4 cm (10 in)
off the ground and below tailgate level. Objects must
also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear bumper. This
distance may be less during warmer or humid weather.
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is
closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when
driving with the tailgate lowered.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the tailgate during the
last drive cycle. Once the attached object is
removed and the tailgate is raised, URPA will
return to normal operation.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the messages PARK ASSIST OFF or PARK
ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL will be
displayed on the DIC.
.
.
A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
The vehicle's bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer to repair the system.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If this message occurs, take
the vehicle to your dealer to repair the system.
.
Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
PARK ASSIST OFF: This message occurs if the driver
disables the system.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at
least 40 km/h (25 mph), take the vehicle to your dealer.
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL:
This message can occur under the following conditions:
.
The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice
and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑113.
.
The park assist sensors are covered by frost or
ice. Frost or ice can form around and behind the
sensors and may not always be seen; this can
occur after washing the vehicle in cold weather.
The message may not clear until the frost or ice
has melted.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles Without Navigation System
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area
behind the vehicle. When the key is in the ON/RUN
position and the driver shifts the vehicle into
R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on
the inside rear view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of
R (Reverse), the video image automatically disappears
from the inside rear view mirror.
This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read this entire section before using it.
WARNING:
{
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
replace driver vision. RVC does not:
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System Off
or On
.
Detect objects that are outside the camera's
field of view, below the bumper, or underneath
the vehicle.
To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and
.
hold z, located on the inside rearview mirror, until the
left indicator light turns off. The rear camera vision
display is now disabled.
Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
or pets.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the
RVC screen, or use the screen during longer,
higher speed backing maneuvers or where there
could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances using
the screen will differ from actual distances.
To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press
and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates. The
rear vision camera system display is now enabled and
the display will appear in the mirror normally.
So if you do not use proper care before backing
up, you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in vehicle damage,
injury, or death. Even though the vehicle has the
RVC system, always check carefully before
backing up by checking behind and around the
vehicle.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles With Navigation System
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area
behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image automatically
appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver shifts
out of R (Reverse), the navigation screen will go back to
the last screen that had been displayed, after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System On
or Off
To turn the rear vision camera system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key to
select Display or touch the Display screen button.
4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video
screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on.
3. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
The delay that is received after shifting out of
R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one of the following:
.
Pressing a hard key on the navigation system.
.
Shifting in to P (Park).
.
Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The symbols appear when an object has been detected
by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the object
when viewing the navigation screen.
Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of
the Screen
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen,
press the MENU button while the rear vision camera
image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only
affect the rear vision camera screen.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
] (Brightness) : Touch the + (plus) or – (minus)
screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
3. Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
repeatedly until Display is selected or touch the
Display screen button.
_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen
button will be highlighted when on.
Symbols
The navigation system may have a feature that lets the
driver view symbols on the navigation screen while
using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park
Assist (URPA) system must not be disabled to use the
caution symbols. If URPA has been disabled and the
symbols have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist
Symbols Unavailable error message may display. See
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3‑60.
Rear Vision Camera Error Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message
can display when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see
your dealer.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.
Rear Vision Camera Location
The image is provided by the camera located in the
bezel for the tailgate handle.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the bumper. The
area displayed on the screen can vary according to
vehicle orientation or road conditions.
A. View displayed by the camera.
B. Corner of the rear bumper.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disconnecting the Rear Vision Camera
To disconnect the camera:
1. Remove the license plate.
2. Disconnect the camera connectors from the
chassis harness, located behind the license plate,
by pressing on the release tab on each connector.
A. Chassis harness connector
B. Release tab
4. Feed the wiring harness through the pickup box,
then plug the camara connectors together to
prevent contamination.
5. Remove the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 3‑12
for more information.
A. Chassis harness connector
B. Release tab
6. Re‐install the license plate.
Reverse this procedure to reinstall the rear vision
camera and make sure the grommet and connection is
secure.
C. Camera connector
3. Plug the two exposed chassis harness connectors
together to prevent contamination.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear vision camera system display in the rearview
mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to
one of the following conditions. If this occurs the left
indicator light on the mirror will flash.
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system might not work properly
or display a clear image if:
.
A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal,
.
or no video signal present during the reverse cycle.
The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section.
.
A fast flash may indicate that the display has been
.
on for the maximum allowable time during a
reverse cycle, or the display has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
It is dark.
.
The sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
The fast flash conditions are used to protect the
video device from high temperature conditions.
Once conditions return to normal the device will
reset and the green indicator will stop flashing.
.
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
.
The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
During any of these fault conditions, the display will be
blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long as
the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions
return to normal.
position and mounting angle of the camera can
change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to
have the camera and its position and mounting
angle checked at your dealer.
Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is
flashing will turn off the video display along with the left
indicator light.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This
includes any garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.
Universal Home Remote
System
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑18 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter
for use in other vehicles, as well as, for future
programming. Only the original remote control
transmitter is needed for Fixed Code programming. The
programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends. See “Erasing
Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in this section.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is
being programmed.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems, and
home automation devices.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit and may be a colored button.
Press this button. After pressing this button,
complete the following steps in less than
30 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may need
to be held for up to 20 seconds.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what
was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can be
used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the
motor head and hand held transmitter are different,
or if the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when
the original hand held transmitter is not available.
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of
the garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
.
When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
.
When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
.
If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into
the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure
to enter the switch settings written down in
Step 2, in order from left to right, into the
Universal Home Remote, when completing
Step 4.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three
buttons at the same time for about three seconds.
Release the buttons to put the Universal Home
Remote into programming mode.
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should be
similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
.
A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
.
A switch in the down position could be labeled
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
.
A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected
button should slowly blink. This button may need to
be held for up to 55 seconds.
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for the
garage door opener.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle's
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now press
one button on the Universal Home Remote for
each switch setting as follows:
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
.
If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
.
.
If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
Storage Areas
Glove Box
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
Cupholders
Vehicles with cupholders have them located on and
behind the center console and in the rear seat armrest.
Pull the loop down on the rear seat armrest to access
the cupholders.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
Pull downward on the cover to access the cupholders
behind the center console.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release
both buttons. The codes from all buttons will be
erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
under Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Storage
Center Console Storage
For vehicles equipped with an instrument panel storage
area, it is located above the glove box.
Vehicles with an upper and lower center console
storage area have cupholders included.
Access the storage area by pressing and holding in the
driver side of the handle and pull out on the exposed
portion of the handle.
Pull the lever (A) up to access the upper storage area.
Raise the upper storage bin, then pull the lever (B) up
to access the lower storage area. Use the key to lock
and unlock the lower storage area.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For vehicles with a roof rack, the rack can be used to
load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails
included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as
an accessory. See your dealer for additional
information.
Roof Rack System
WARNING:
{
Notice: Loading cargo on the roof rack that weighs
more than 91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over the rear or
sides of the vehicle may damage the vehicle. Load
cargo so that it rests evenly between the crossrails,
making sure to fasten cargo securely.
If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is
longer or wider than the roof rack— like paneling,
plywood, or a mattress— the wind can catch it
while the vehicle is being driven. The item being
carried could be violently torn off, and this could
cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider than the roof rack
on top of the vehicle unless using a GM Certified
accessory carrier.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo when driving, check
to make sure crossrails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof rack will make the
vehicle’s center of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt
maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control.
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high
speeds, occasionally stop the vehicle to make sure the
cargo remains in its place.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on
Rear Seat Armrest
Vehicles with a rear seat armrest have two cupholders.
Pull the armrest down from the rear seatback to access
the cupholders.
page 5‑29
.
.
If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood to
the siderail supports.
Sunroof
On vehicles with a power sliding sunroof, the ignition
needs to be turned to RUN, or the Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be activated to open or close the
sunroof. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work for
10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until the
driver's door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑23 for more information.
.
Tie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the
siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep
the load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift the
release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then
slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the release lever
down on both sides of the rail, down to tighten it.
Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to
make sure it is tight.
Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of time
while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the
tracks and damage the sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
.
.
To carry long items, move the crossrails as far
apart as possible. Tie the load to the crossrails and
the siderails or siderail supports. Also tie the load
to the bumpers, but do not tie the load so tightly
that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
above the rear window glass.
Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do
not block or damage the CHMSL.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sunroof also has a roller sunshade that can be
used to block the rays of the sun. The roller sunshade
can be manually operated with the sunroof in an open
or closed position. To open the sunshade, press and
unlatch it, and roll it back. To close, pull it forward and
latch it into the closed position.
Extended Cab
If your vehicle is an
extended cab, the sunroof
switch is located on the
headliner above the
rearview mirror.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Crew Cab
If your vehicle is a crew
cab, there are two sunroof
switches located in the
overhead console above
the rearview mirror.
Vent: From the closed position, press and hold the rear
of the switch to vent the sunroof. To close the sunroof,
press and hold the front of the switch.
Open: From the vent position, the sunroof can be fully
opened either manually or by using the express-open
feature. To open manually, press the rear of the switch
to the first depression and hold until the sunroof has
reached the desired position. To open using
express-open, press the rear of the switch fully and
release. The sunroof will move to the full open position.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time.
Vent: From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger's side switch to vent the sunroof. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the passenger's
side switch.
Close: From the vent, or open position, press and hold
the front of the switch to close the sunroof.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver's side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close the
sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver's side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
Anti-Pinch Feature (Crew Cab Only): If an object is in
the path of the sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch
feature will detect the object and stop the sunroof from
closing at the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will
then open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To
close the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
Express-Close or Manual-Close functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and
there is an object in the path of the sunroof when it
closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object and
stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has
stopped, refer to the Vent functions described
previously.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver's
side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop
the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To
express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the
front of the driver's side switch. The sunroof will close
automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the
switch a second time.
Do not leave the sunroof open for long periods of time
while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in the
tracks and damage the sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
The sunroof also has a sunshade which you can pull
forward to block sun rays. The sunshade must be
opened and closed manually.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Battery Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Accessory Power Outlet(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Headlamps on Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Climate Control System (With Air
Conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Climate Control System (With Heater Only) . . . . 4-21
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . 4-22
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . 4-28
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Airbag Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light . . . 4-38
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4 Instrument Panel
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD) . . . . 4-112
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
Navigation/Radio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System . . . . . . 4-132
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . 4-147
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Instrument Panel Overview
Hazard Warning Flashers
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn
the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's
turn signals will not work.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbols located on
the steering wheel.
The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the
steering column.
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever.
2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position.
3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the
instrument panel cluster
flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until
the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This
causes the turn signals to automatically flash three
times. It will flash six times if tow-haul mode is active.
Holding the turn signal lever for more than one second
will cause the turn signals to flash until you release the
lever.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
The lever returns to its starting position whenever it is
released.
L : Windshield Washer
Flash-to-Pass.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be
burned out.
Exterior Lamps.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 6‑118
.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn
signal, if the vehicle has a radio. The message TURN
SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information
Control (DIC). To turn the chime and message off, move
the turn signal lever to the off position.
This feature lets you use the high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if the headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If the headlamps are in the automatic position or on low
beam, the high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you. The
high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced.
See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
Windshield Wipers
page 6‑63
.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Windshield Washer
WARNING:
{
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8, then release.
Several wipes, hold the band on 8 longer.
9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers off.
6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): Turn the band up for
more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The
wipers clear the window and then either stop or return
to the preset speed.
6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.
? (High Speed): Fast wipes.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the brakes are applied, cruise control is
turned off.
Cruise Control
WARNING:
For vehicles with an Allison® or Hydra‐Matic 6‐speed
automatic transmission, see “Grade Braking and Cruise
Grade Braking (Allison Transmission) under Tow/Haul
Mode on page 3‑34 for an explanation of how cruise
control interacts with the Range Selection Mode, tow/
haul and grade braking systems.
For vehicles with the StabiliTrak® system that begins to
limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6. When road
conditions allow the cruise control to be safely used
again, it can be turned back on.
{
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
For vehicles with cruise control, a speed of about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph).
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
If the cruise button is on when not in use, it could get
bumped and go into cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise is not being used.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to the
desired speed.
1. Press I button to turn the cruise control on.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press and release the SET− button located on the
steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
I (On/Off): Turns the system on or off. The indicator
light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when
cruise control is off.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press briefly to make the
vehicle resume to a previously set speed, or press and
hold to accelerate.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed and activate
cruise control or make the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press to disengage cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged
without erasing the set speed from memory.
If the cruise control system is already activated,
.
Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
Once the vehicle speed reaches about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more, press the +RES button on the
steering wheel. The vehicle returns to the previous set
speed and stays there.
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
.
To slow down in small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
(1 mph) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is already activated,
.
Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
.
To increase vehicle speed in small amounts, press
the +RES button. Each time this is done, the
vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Exterior Lamps
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you might have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle speed.
When going downhill, you might have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down. When
the brakes are applied the cruise control is disengaged.
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the
left of the steering wheel.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
It controls the following systems:
.
.
To disengage cruise control; step lightly on the
Headlamps
brake pedal.
.
Taillamps
.
Press [ on the steering wheel.
.
Parking Lamps
.
.
To turn off the cruise control, press I on the
steering wheel.
License Plate Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
Erasing Speed Memory
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
O (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on.
The cruise control set speed is erased from memory by
pressing the I button or if the ignition is turned off.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off
to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on for
a set time. The time of the delay can be changed using
the DIC. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on
page 4‑49 (If Equipped).
Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to change the headlamps from low
beam to high beam.
Headlamps on Reminder
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
For vehicles with a radio, a reminder chime sounds
when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually
turned on, the ignition is off and a door is open. To
disable the chime, turn the light off.
together with the following:
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together with
the following:
.
Parking Lamps
.
Instrument Panel Lights
.
Taillamps
.
License Plate Lamps
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on
all vehicles first sold in Canada.
When it is dark enough outside, the automatic
headlamp system turns on the headlamps at the normal
brightness, along with the taillamps, sidemarker, parking
lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights
will also be dim.
The DRL system comes on when the following
conditions are met:
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release it. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before the
automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
.
The ignition is on.
.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
.
The engine is running.
.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel in the defroster grille that regulates
when the automatic headlamps turn on. Do not cover
the sensor or the headlamps will come on whenever the
ignition is on.
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL system is on, only the DRL lamps are
on. The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights,
and other lamps will not be on.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system switches from DRL to the headlamps.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or heavy overcast
weather. This is normal.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be
in the P (Park) position, before the DRL lamps can be
turned off.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps
(DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that
driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor
detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the
delay.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system comes on immediately. Once the
vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that
delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument
Panel Brightness on page 4‑14.
Fog Lamps
For vehicles with fog lamps, the control is located next
to the exterior lamps control on the instrument panel, to
the left of the steering column.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position for the fog
lamps to come on.
# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the fog lamps on or off.
A light will come on in the instrument panel cluster.
To idle the vehicle with the automatic headlamp system
off, turn the control to the off position.
When the fog lamps are turned on, the parking lamps
automatically turn on.
The headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. This feature can be programmed using the
Driver Information Center (DIC), if equipped. See DIC
Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam, the
fog lamps also go off. When the high-beam headlamps
are turned off, the fog lamps will come on again.
page 4‑73
.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
If the vehicle is not equipped with DIC buttons, exit
lighting is automatic. When it is dark enough outside,
the exterior lamps remain on for 30 seconds after the
ignition is moved from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
For vehicles without a radio, the instrument panel light
remains on for 30 seconds with the driver's door closed.
For vehicles with a radio, the instrument panel light
remains on for 10 minutes with the driver's door closed.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3‑23.
The regular headlamp system can be turned on when
needed.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has this button, the vehicle may have the
snow plow prep package. For further information see
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on
Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp
If the vehicle has this feature, this button includes wiring
provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to
install an auxiliary roof lamp.
page 5‑37
.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights
and is located next to the exterior lamp control.
This button is located on
the overhead console.
Push the knob to extend out and then it can be turned.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the instrument panel lights. Turning the knob to
the farthest clockwise position turns on the dome lamps.
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will
activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the
bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button will
turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or
closed.
The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps,
so the total current draw of the attached lamps should
be less than this value. The attachment points for the
roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires located above
the overhead console, a dark green switched power
wire and a black ground wire.
For further information on roof mount emergency lamp
installation, please visit the GM Upfitter website at
www.gmupfitters.com or contact your dealer.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp Override
Reading Lamps
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
For vehicles with reading lamps, they are located on the
overhead console.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the extended position so that
the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located
next to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button
again.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp.
Entry Lighting
The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature.
If the vehicle has a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system, press the lamp lenses to turn the lamps
on or off.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the extended
position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the
lamps will not come on.
The lamps are fixed and cannot be adjusted.
Cargo Lamp
Exit Lighting
The cargo lamps come on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control knob to the farthest clockwise
position. This knob is located on the instrument panel
and also turns on the dome lamps.
The interior lamps come on when the key is removed
from the ignition. They turn off automatically in
20 seconds. The lights do not come on if the dome
override button is pressed in.
The cargo lamp can be used if more light is needed in
the cargo area of the vehicle or in the top-box storage
units.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM) that
estimates the battery's temperature and state of charge.
It then adjusts the voltage for best performance and
extended life of the battery.
When the battery's state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gauge or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER
ACTIVE, BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW
BATTERY. If this message is displayed, it is
recommended that the driver reduce the electrical loads
as much as possible. See DIC Warnings and Messages
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
on page 4‑63
.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome and reading lamps,
if they are left on for more than 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned off. The cargo lamp shuts off after
20 minutes. This prevents the battery from
running down.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high
speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads,
and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer for additional information on the
accessory power plugs.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
The vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located below the climate control system, or may have
one accessory power outlet and one cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the
receptacle closest to the driver.
The accessory power outlets are powered, even when
the ignition is in LOCK/OFF. Continuing to use power
outlets while the ignition is in LOCK/OFF may cause the
vehicle's battery to run down.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer before adding
electrical equipment.
There may be another accessory power outlet in the
rear cargo area. If the vehicle has a floor console, there
is an accessory power outlet inside the storage bin and
one on the rear of the floor console.
To use an accessory power outlet, remove the
protective cap. When not in use, always cover the
accessory power outlet with the protective cap.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment plugged in for
an extended period of time while the vehicle is off
will drain the battery. Power is always supplied to
the outlets. Always unplug electrical equipment
when not in use and do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere rating.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
The vehicle may have a front ashtray located near the
center of the instrument panel. Pull on the door to open
it. The ashtray may have a cigarette lighter.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System (With Air
Conditioning)
With this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation
can be controlled.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are
put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, open the door and pull the
ashtray bin toward you. To replace the ashtray, insert
the ashtray bin inside the ashtray door and press down
until it engages. To use the cigarette lighter, push it in
all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use, the
lighter pops back out.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
A. Fan Control
E. Outside Air
B. Temperature Control
F. Recirculation
C. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Rear Window
Defogger
D. Air Conditioning
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and the side window vents, with some air
directed to the floor vents. The system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all
the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected in the defog
or defrost mode. When either mode is selected, the
system runs the air conditioning compressor, unless the
outside temperature is close to freezing.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between
two modes to select a combination of those modes.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Select from the following:
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that outside air
is on. In this mode outside air circulates throughout the
vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with all
modes, but it cannot be used with the
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets.
recirculation mode.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
air directed to the windshield and side window outlets.
In this mode, the system automatically selects outside
air. Recirculation cannot be selected in floor mode.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog
or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of
these modes, the indicator light flashes three times and
then turns off. While in recirculation mode the windows
may fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear
the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and
increase the fan speed.
Rear Window Defogger
For vehicles with a rear window defogger, a warming
grid is used to remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or
off. An indicator light on the button comes on to show
that the rear window defogger is on.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing
the outside air button, or by turning off the ignition.
The rear window defogger only works when the ignition
is in ON/RUN. The rear window defogger stays on for
approximately 10 minutes after the button is pressed,
unless the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning off the engine.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is on. The air conditioning can
be selected in any mode as long as the fan switch is on.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all
the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off.
Climate Control System (With
Heater Only)
With this system the heating and ventilation can be
controlled.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle. The knob can be
positioned between two modes to select a combination
of those modes.
Select from the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
air directed to the windshield, side window, and second
row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
A. Fan Control
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents.
B. Temperature Control
C. Air Delivery Mode Control
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and the side window vents, with some air
directed to the floor vents. The system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle.
Temperature Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside the vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on
or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed
to the floor. This direction can be changed by pressing
the mode button. Recirculation can be selected once
you have selected vent or bi-level mode. The
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has a
flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
temperature can also be adjusted using either
temperature button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted with the system off,
the display illuminates briefly to show the settings and
then returns to off. The system can be turned back on
by pressing either O, D, C, #, the defrost or the AUTO
button.
Driver and Passenger Side Temperature
Controls
The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are
used to adjust the temperature of the air coming
through the system on the driver or passenger's side of
the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if
the system is turned off. This is possible since outside
air always flows through the system as the vehicle is
moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
A. Driver and Passenger G. Air Delivery Mode
Temperature Controls
B. Fan Control
C. AUTO
Control
H. Display
I. Power Button
J. Rear Window Defogger
K. Air Conditioning
L. PASS (Passenger)
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side or passenger side
temperature display shows the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing.
D. Defrost
E. Recirculation
F. Outside Air
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger's temperature setting can be set to
match the driver's temperature setting by pressing the
PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. When
the passenger's temperature setting is set different than
the driver's setting, the indicator on the PASS button
illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side
temperature displays are shown.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet are automatically controlled.
The air conditioning compressor may run when the
outside temperature is above freezing. The air inlet
will normally be set to outside air. If it is hot
outside, the air inlet may automatically switch to
the recirculate mode to help quickly cool down the
air inside the vehicle. The light on the button
comes on in recirculation.
When in defrost mode the passenger temperature
setting cannot be changed.
2. Set the driver's and passenger's temperature.
Automatic Operation
To find your comfort setting, start with a 23°C
(74°F) temperature setting and allow about
20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the
driver or passenger temperature buttons to adjust
the temperature setting as necessary. If a
temperature setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen, the
system remains at the maximum cooling setting.
If a temperature setting of 32°C (90°F) is chosen,
the system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active
the system controls the inside temperature, the air
delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display changes to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO is lit on
the display. The current air delivery mode and fan
speed are also displayed for about 5 seconds.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load. For more
information on the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in
this section.
The air delivery mode setting is displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The fan remains under automatic
control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
delays turning the fan on until warm air is available. The
length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch overrides this
delay and changes the fan to a selected speed.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
windshield and side window outlets.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row
floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
Manual Operation
D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. In this mode, the system turns
off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in the defrost mode.
Pressing either fan button while in automatic control
places the fan under manual control. The fan setting
remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under automatic control.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these buttons
to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Pressing either mode button
while the system is off changes the air delivery mode
without turning the system on. Pressing either mode
button while in automatic control places the mode under
manual control.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this button is pressed when the air conditioning
compressor is unavailable due to outside conditions, the
indicator flashes three times and then turns off. If the air
conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops
below a temperature which is too cool for air
conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light
turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has
been canceled.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window vents, with some directed
to the floor vents. In this mode, the system
automatically forces outside air into the vehicle and
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes
for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
The passenger temperature control cannot be activated
while in defrost mode. If the PASS button is pressed,
the button indicator flashes three times and will not
work. If the passenger temperature buttons are
adjusted, the driver temperature indicator changes. The
passenger temperature will not be displayed.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
If vent, bi-level, or floor mode is selected again, the
climate control system displays the previous
temperature settings.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that the
recirculation is on.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator
light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog,
or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of
those modes, the indicator light flashes three times and
then turns off. The air conditioning compressor also
comes on when this mode is activated. While in
recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): For vehicles with this
feature, press to turn the defogger on or off.
It automatically turns off several minutes after it has
been activated. The defogger can also be turned off by
turning the engine off. Do not drive the vehicle until all
the windows are clear.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing
the outside air button, or by turning off the ignition.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light on the button comes on to show
that outside is on. When selected, air from outside the
vehicle circulates throughout the vehicle. The outside
air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot be
used with the recirculation mode.
Heated Mirror: For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear
window defog button is pressed. See Outside Power
Mirrors on page 3‑57.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The interior temperature
sensor, located in the
headliner, measures the
temperature of the air
inside the vehicle.
Sensors
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside
the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could
cause a false reading in the displayed temperature.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, in the
middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat.
Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not
work properly.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air
to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gauges can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could prevent injury.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off
the airflow.
Operation Tips
.
Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets
at the base of the windshield that could block the
flow of air into the vehicle.
Warning lights come on when there might be or there is
a problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
.
.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of
objects to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle
more effectively.
Gauges can indicate when there might be or there is a
problem with one of the vehicle's functions. Often
gauges and warning lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Use of non‐GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of the vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gauges shows there
could be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual's advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Light Duty Premium version shown. Canada, Uplevel, Base, Heavy Duty Clusters similar.
For vehicles with a DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or
kilometers (used in Canada).
The trip odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the voltmeter, to toggle between the trip
odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset
button for approximately one second while the trip
odometer is displayed will reset it.
Engine Hour Meter Display
The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display
the number of hours the engine has run. To display the
engine hours, turn the ignition off, press and hold the
reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter
displays for up to 30 seconds, or until the ignition is
turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑56 for more
information.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑56 for more information.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). For a description of how
Grade Braking affects vehicle speed while the Tow/Haul
Mode is activated, see “Grade Braking (Allison
Transmission®)” under Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑34
for more information.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt
reminder light, several seconds after the engine is
started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind
the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The
passenger safety belt light, located on the overhead
console, comes on and stays on for several seconds,
flashes for several more seconds and then comes on
solid for several more.
Driver Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt
light flashes for
several seconds, then
comes on solid for
several more.
This chime and light
sequence is repeated if
the passenger remains
unbuckled and the vehicle
is in motion.
This chime and light sequence are repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the
driver safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light comes on.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also
come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑63 for more information.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag's electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the
airbag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on page 2‑73.
Airbag Off Light
If the vehicle has an airbag on-off switch, it also has a
passenger airbag status indicator located in the
overhead console.
The airbag readiness light
comes on solid for a few
seconds when the engine
is started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
United States
Canada
WARNING:
{
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for
on and off, will light for several seconds as a system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol, will
light to let you know the status of the right front
passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the right front passenger airbag is manually
turned off using the airbag on-off switch in the glove
box, the indicator light OFF or the off symbol will come
on and stay on as a reminder that the airbag has been
turned off. This light will go off when the airbag has
been turned on. See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82
for more information, including important safety
information.
WARNING:
{
If the right front passenger's airbag is turned off
for a person who is not in a risk group identified
by the national government, that person will not
have the extra protection of an airbag. In a crash,
the airbag will not be able to inflate and help
protect the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the passenger's airbag unless the
person sitting there is in a risk group identified by
the national government. See Airbag Off Switch
on page 2‑82 for more on this, including
important safety information.
United States
Canada
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
WARNING:
{
If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then the vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger position
unless there is an airbag off switch located in the glove
box. If there is an airbag off switch, the vehicle does not
have a passenger system system. See Airbag Off
Switch on page 2‑82.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. For example, the right
front passenger airbag could inflate even though
the airbag on-off switch is turned off.
The passenger airbag status indicator is on the
overhead console. See Passenger Sensing System on
page 2‑86 for important safety information.
To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have the
vehicle serviced right away. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4‑32 for more
In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, the label
on the vehicle's sun visor refers to “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS”.
information, including important safety information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit, it means that the
right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may
inflate). See Airbag Off Switch on page 2‑82 for more
information, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the airbag on-off switch. See
your dealer for service.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger frontal
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for
on and off, for several seconds as a system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
WARNING:
{
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
for more information, including important safety
information.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gauge
This light comes on briefly
For vehicles with a
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but the
engine is not running, as
a check to show it is
working.
voltmeter gauge, this
gauge indicates the
battery voltage when the
ignition is turned on.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63 for
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the
vehicle must be driven a short distance with the light on,
turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
When the ignition is on, this gauge indicates the battery
voltage.
When the engine is running, this gauge shows the
condition of the charging system. The gauge can
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading. This is normal. If the vehicle is operating
outside the normal operating range, the charging
system light comes on. See Charging System Light on
page 4‑36 for more information. The voltmeter gauge
may also read lower when in fuel economy mode. This
is normal.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readings outside the normal operating range can also
occur when a large number of electrical accessories are
operating in the vehicle and the engine is left idling for
an extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power at
engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. If the vehicle
is driven with the parking brake engaged, a chime
sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
The vehicle's hydraulic brake system is divided into two
parts. If one part is not working, the other part can still
work and stop the vehicle. For good braking, both parts
need to be working well.
The vehicle can only be driven for a short time with the
readings outside the normal operating range. If the
vehicle must be driven, turn off all accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have the brake system
inspected right away.
Readings outside the normal operating range indicate a
possible problem in the electrical system. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
This light can also come on due to low brake fluid. See
Brakes on page 6‑39 for more information.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
See Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑44.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
United States
Canada
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine is
started.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem.
WARNING:
{
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning light is also on, the
vehicle does not have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 4‑37.
For vehicles with the
StabiliTrak® system, this
light comes on briefly
while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63 for all
brake related DIC messages.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there
could be a problem with the StabiliTrak® system and the
vehicle might need service. When this warning light is
on, the StabiliTrak® system is off and does not limit
wheel spin.
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions.
See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 for more
information.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides
information about tire
pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
This indicates that one or more of the tires is
significantly underinflated.
United States
Canada
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 4‑49 for more
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73
for more information.
This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gauge
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and go over the 235°F (113°C) mark. However,
if the gauge reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it
indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its
capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 6‑34.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on
when the ignition is on,
but the engine is not
running, as a check to
show it is working. If it
does not, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a
minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
page 6‑76 for more information.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for
the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can
prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the vehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds, and
restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer for service as soon
as possible.
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
Accessories and Modifications on page 6‑4.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
.
Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling
the Tank on page 6‑11. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
.
.
If the vehicle has been driven through a deep
Reduce vehicle speed.
puddle of water, the vehicle's electrical system
might be wet. The condition is usually corrected
when the electrical system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
.
Avoid hard accelerations.
.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
.
If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled as soon as it is possible.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can cause: stalling after
start-up, stalling when the vehicle is changed into
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration. These conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change
the fuel brand used. It will require at least one full
tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
The DLC is under the instrument panel to the left of the
steering wheel. See your dealer if assistance is needed.
See Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
The vehicle may not pass inspection if:
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer can check the vehicle. The dealer has the proper
test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
.
the check engine light is on with the engine
running, or if the light does not come on when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN while the engine
is off.
.
the critical emission control systems have not been
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
programs to inspect the on-vehicle emission control
equipment For the inspection, the emission system test
equipment is connected to the vehicle’s Data Link
Connector (DLC).
completely diagnosed by the system. This can
happen if the battery has recently been replaced or
if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
evaluates critical emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take several days of
routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection, your
dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading outside the normal operating range can be
caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other
problem causing low oil pressure. Check the vehicle's
oil as soon as possible. See “OIL PRESSURE LOW”
under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63 and
Engine Oil on page 6‑18.
Oil Pressure Gauge
WARNING:
{
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
For vehicles with an engine oil pressure gauge, it shows
the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil pressure can vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil pressure light comes
on. See Oil Pressure Light on page 4‑45 for more
information.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Oil Pressure Light
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it
does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the system is working normally the indicator light then
goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other
system problem.
WARNING:
{
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle's
security system, see
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 3‑17
.
Fog Lamp Light
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
See Cruise Control on page 4‑7 for more information.
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps
are in use.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
See Fog Lamps on page 4‑13 for more information.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4‑5
for more information.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
Fuel Gauge
The four-wheel-drive light
comes on when a vehicle
with a manual transfer
case is shifted into
four-wheel drive and the
front axle engages.
Some delay between the shifting and the light coming
on is normal.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36 for more
information.
United States
Canada
When the ignition is on, the fuel gauge shows about
how much fuel is left in the fuel tank.
Tow/Haul Mode Light
For vehicles with the tow/
haul mode feature, this
light comes on when the
Tow/Haul mode has been
activated.
An arrow on the fuel gauge indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
The gauge will first indicate empty before the vehicle is
out of fuel, but the vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on
page 3‑34
.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the fuel tank is low the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑63 for more information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, under the fuel
gauge, comes on briefly
while the engine is being
started.
Here are some situations owners can experience with
the fuel gauge. None of these indicate a problem with
the fuel gauge.
.
At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gauge reads full.
.
It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gauge indicated. For example, the gauge may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the fuel tank's
capacity to fill it.
This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is
low on fuel. The Driver Information Center also displays
a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” message. See DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑63 for more information.
When fuel is added this light and message should go
off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
.
The gauge goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
For a diesel engine, see “Fuel Gauge” in the Diesel
Engine Supplement.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑73 for the displays available.
If the vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the trip
odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC displays.
See “Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items” later in
this section.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
hours, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, compass zone setting, and compass
recalibration.
DIC Buttons
The buttons are the trip/
fuel, vehicle information,
customization, and set/
reset buttons. The button
functions are detailed in
the following pages.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize the
feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑73 for
more information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on
the DIC.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Odometer
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, instantaneous economy and Active
Fuel Management™ indicator, and transmission
temperature. The compass and outside temperature will
also be shown in the display. The temperature will be
shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected.
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will also display the
odometer.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles with
the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer brake
gain and output information for vehicles with the
Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, engine
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Odometer
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
also display the trip odometer.
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW
if the fuel level is low.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
You can also reset the trip odometer while it is
displayed by pressing and holding the trip odometer
reset stem.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and
the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This
estimate will change if driving conditions change. For
example, if driving in traffic and making frequent stops,
this display may read one number, but if the vehicle is
driven on a freeway, the number may change even
though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This
is because different driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway driving produces
better fuel economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot
be reset.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate average
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number is calculated based on the
number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY,
press and hold the set/reset button.
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Used
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel
Management™ Indicator
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This
display can be used as a timer.
If your vehicle has this display, press the trip/fuel button
until INST ECON V8 displays. This display shows the
current fuel economy at a particular moment and will
change frequently as driving conditions change. This
display shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Unlike average economy, this screen cannot be reset.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last reset,
not including time the ignition is off. Time will continue
to be counted as long as the ignition is on, even if
another display is being shown on the DIC. The
timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and
59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will return
to zero.
An Active Fuel Management indicator will display on the
right side of the DIC, while INST ECON displays on the
left side. Active Fuel Management allows the engine to
operate on either four or eight cylinders, depending on
your driving demands. When Active Fuel Management
is active, V4 will display on the DIC. When Active Fuel
Management is inactive, V8 will display. See Active
Fuel Management™ on page 3‑27 for more
information.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Units
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle
information will then be displayed in the unit of
measurement selected.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL
LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of
the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
Tire Pressure
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63. You should
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more information.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays FRONT
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle
information button again until the DIC displays REAR
TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to add
pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63 for more
information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer for service.
Relearn Remote Key
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure will
erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the
DIC. Press the vehicle information button until TRAILER
GAIN and OUTPUT display.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more information.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the
OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more
information.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Engine Hours
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Zone Setting
Trip Odometer
This display allows for setting the compass zone. See
DIC Compass on page 4‑60 for more information.
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass. See
DIC Compass on page 4‑60 for more information.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
Blank Display
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
This display shows no information.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Use the trip odometer reset stem to view the odometer
and trip odometer. The Language selection and Engine
Hours display can also be accessed with the trip
odometer reset stem.
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds. The
trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
Odometer
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language
DIC Operation and Displays (Without
DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of this system.
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available
languages.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
The available selections are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
NO CHANGE.
If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can use
the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: language selection, trip odometer,
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
transmission temperature, trailer brake gain and output
information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system, compass zone setting, compass
recalibration, oil life, Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) programming for vehicles with the TPMS, and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming.
Engine Hours
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Odometer
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Language
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the
number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available
languages.
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds. The
trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles
(8.4 km), etc.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and
NO CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transmission Temperature
Compass Zone Setting
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP
displays. This display shows the temperature of the
automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
This display allows for setting the compass zone. See
DIC Compass on page 4‑60 for more information.
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass. See
DIC Compass on page 4‑60 for more information.
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the
DIC. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER
GAIN and OUTPUT display.
Oil Life
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL
LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of
the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more information.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the
OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more
information.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63. You should
change the oil as soon as you can. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 for
more information.
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
To match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
Relearn Tire Positions
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
Your vehicle may have this display. To access this
display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). If your vehicle
has the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor, the
system must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the
tire positions, see Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑75. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑80 and DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑63 for more information.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Relearn Remote Key
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure will
erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore,
they must be relearned as additional transmitters.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth's
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
compass may give false readings. The compass must
be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer will set the correct zone for your location.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays. Or,
if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press the
trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE COMPASS
ZONE displays.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press
and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
two seconds to select the next available variance
zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate
variance zone is displayed.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in which
the vehicle is located. See “Compass Variance
(Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during the
calibration procedure.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount,
a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move
the magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate
the compass.
2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS
V TO CALIBRATE COMPASS displays. Or, if the
vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press the trip
odometer reset stem until CALIBRATE COMPASS
displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem for two seconds to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration.
The DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE
for a few seconds when the calibration is complete.
The DIC display will then return to the
previous menu.
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY LOW START VEHICLE
DIC Warnings and Messages
When the vehicle’s battery is severely discharged, this
message will display and four chimes may sound. Start
the vehicle immediately. If the vehicle is not started and
the battery continues to discharge, the climate controls,
heated seats, and audio systems will shut off and the
vehicle may require a jump start. These systems will
function again after the vehicle is started.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to
reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 6‑20 for information on
how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18 and Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be cleared.
You should take any messages that appear on the
display seriously and remember that clearing the
messages will only make the messages disappear, not
correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime
may sound when one of the following conditions exists:
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted
out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check
to see if the message still appears on the DIC.
.
A trailer with electric brakes becomes
disconnected from the vehicle.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stopped, this message clears itself after a
short time.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
See Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge on
page 4‑40. To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the
air conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
‐ If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message stays on until the ignition
is turned off.
.
There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer
brakes.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer is
reconnected. This message also clears if you
ENGINE OIL HOT IDLE ENGINE
acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either your
vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer.
This message displays when the engine oil becomes
hotter than the normal operating temperature. Stop and
allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more information.
Coolant Temperature Gauge on page 4‑40
.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑34 for
more information.
This message displays and a chime may sound when
the cooling system temperature gets too hot and the
engine further enters the engine coolant protection
mode. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑34 for
further information.
This message also displays when the vehicle's engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle's ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime this
message stays on, the vehicle should be taken to your
dealer for service as soon as possible.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑40.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 6‑36 for information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an
overheat warning appears on the instrument panel
cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6‑34 for
more information.
FAST IDLE ON
If your vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when the fast idle feature is on. See Fast Idle System
on page 3‑25 for more information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel
Gauge on page 4‑47 and Fuel on page 6‑6 for more
information.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels occur.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not
operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has
been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your dealer. See Engine
Oil on page 6‑18.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
PARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS
MANUAL
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is
something interfering with the park assist system. See
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 3‑60
for more information.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when ice conditions are
possible.
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
PARK ASSIST OFF
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this
message displays to remind the driver that the URPA
system has been turned off. Press the set/reset button
or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge this
message and clear it from the DIC display. To turn the
URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) on page 3‑60.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil
pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur.
If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause
of the low oil pressure is corrected. See Engine Oil
on page 6‑18 for more information.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN (Crew Cab)
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
front passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the
door again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message may display while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your
vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle”
under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation
on page 3‑4 and DIC Operation and Displays (With
DIC Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑56 for more
information.
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, this message may
display if a problem occurs with the four-wheel-drive
system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Make sure the key is
in the LOCK/OFF position for at least one minute and
then restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or
appears again when you begin driving, the
four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your
dealer.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to
be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer inspect the system for
problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 4‑32
and Airbag System on page 2‑73 for more information.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the brake system. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed or
appears again when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service. See your dealer.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn on
in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
Light on page 4‑36. Driving with this problem could
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) on page 3‑60 for more information. See your
dealer for service.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake
system. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 4‑37. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If the
message is still displayed or appears again when you
begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon
as possible. See your dealer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to reset
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should
see your dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so
reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may
or may not restart so you may want to take the vehicle
to your dealer before turning off the engine. See
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation on
page 3‑19 for more information.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
accordingly. See your dealer for service. See
StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 for more
information.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime may
sound when there is a problem with the ITBC system.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the system
is not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4‑40. Several
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑76 for more
information. If the warning comes on and stays on,
there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. If this message still displays, either
your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
dealer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more information.
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow and
you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it, or if
you are driving in extreme off-road conditions and
require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑27. To turn the
StabiliTrak system on or off, see StabiliTrak® System
The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer.
The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
on page 5‑6
.
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle's fuel
cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 4‑41. Reinstall the fuel cap fully. See
Filling the Tank on page 6‑11. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows
fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly installed should turn this light
and message off.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
.
One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak® activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
.
The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
Light on page 4‑37.
4-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
than one tire pressure message at a time. To read the
other messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. See Tires on page 6‑64, Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑29, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑73. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See “DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons)” earlier in this section.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the system is
re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. See “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” earlier in
this section for more information. The tire positions must
be re-learned after rotating the tires or after replacing a
tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑80, Tire Pressure Monitor System on
page 6‑75, and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73
for more information.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off.
Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak®
System on page 5‑6 for more information.
If your vehicle has the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle's tires is low. This message
also displays LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right
front), LEFT RR (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear) to
indicate the location of the low tire. The low tire
pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 4‑40. You can receive more
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays and a chime may sound if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears and
the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches a
safe level.
TRAILER CONNECTED
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when a
trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the
vehicle.
This message clears itself after several seconds. This
message also clears if you acknowledge it. After this
message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT display
appears in the DIC.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime may sound if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC Operation
and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑56 and “Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System” under Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for more
information.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 6‑16 for the location of the windshield washer
fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑38 for more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you can
damage the transmission. This could lead to costly
repairs that would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
4-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Buttons)
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be
programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot
be programmed to a preferred setting for two different
drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through
the available customizable options.
Feature Settings Menu Items
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle's
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 3‑10 for more
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
P (Park).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will automatically lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
You can also change the language by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows
you to select which doors and when the doors will
automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
Door Locks on page 3‑10 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4 for more
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver's door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver's door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) .
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock when the
key is taken out of the ignition.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock
button is pressed again within five seconds of the
previous command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
On vehicles with a crew cab, this feature allows you to
select whether or not the locking of the vehicle's doors
will be delayed. When locking the doors with the power
door lock switch and a door is open, this feature will
delay locking the doors until five seconds after the last
door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in use. The key must be
out of the ignition for this feature to work. You can
temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice. See Delayed Locking on
page 3‑10 for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3‑4
for more information.
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle's
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
doors.
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
after the last door is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light periods
after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle
is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 3‑4 for more information.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
CHIME VOLUME
If available, this feature allows you to select the volume
level of the chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver's outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger's outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's and passenger's outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse). See
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors on page 3‑58 for
more information.
4-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2‑8
for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EASY EXIT SETUP
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic easy
exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on
page 2‑8 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for more
information.
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the
easy exit seat button.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the
driver's seat will move back when the key is removed
from the ignition or after pressing the easy exit seat
button.
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
SEAT ONLY (default): The driver's seat will recall.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition.
If the automatic movement has already occurred, and
you put the key back in the ignition and remove it again,
the seat will stay in the original exit position, unless a
memory recall took place prior to removing the key
again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on
page 2‑8 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 3‑7 for more
information.
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will
occur.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON: The driver's seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On some
vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake pedal
feature, the pedals will also automatically move. See
“Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on
page 4‑56 for more information on matching
transmitters to driver ID numbers.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
4-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTINGS
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/
reset button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
will be set to their factory default settings.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
.
The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
.
The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
.
The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
.
A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Contact your dealer before adding any
equipment.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle's engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
WARNING:
{
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 3‑23 for more information.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Setting the Clock
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
AM-FM Radio
To set the time:
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
.
Become familiar with the operation and controls of
RUN, then press the O button to turn the radio on.
the audio system.
2. Press the H button until the hour numbers begin to
.
Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
flash, then turn the f knob to increase or decrease
the hour.
radio stations.
For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 5‑2
.
4-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
3. Press the H button until the minute numbers begin
to flash, then turn the f knob to increase or
decrease the minutes.
.
Press the softkey below the selected tab.
.
Press the ¨ SEEK button.
4. Press the H button until the 12HR or 24HR time
.
format begins to flash, then turn the f knob to
Press the \ FWD button.
change the time format.
.
Turn the f knob clockwise.
5. Press the H button again until the clock display
stops flashing to set the currently displayed time,
or wait until the flashing stops after five seconds
and the current time displayed automatically sets.
5. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
.
Press the © SEEK button.
.
Press the s REV button.
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
.
Turn the f knob counterclockwise.
To set the time and date:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
RUN, then press the O button to turn the radio on.
1. Press the H button and then the softkey located
below the forward arrow tab. 12H, 24H, the date
MM/DD (month and day), and DD/MM (day and
month) displays.
2. Press the H button to display HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year).
3. Press the softkey located under any one of the
tabs to change that setting.
2. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
3. Press the H button again to apply the desired
option, or let the screen time out.
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To decrease the time or date, do one of the
following:
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
To set the time and date:
.
Press the © SEEK button.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/
.
Press the s REV button.
RUN, then press the O button to turn the radio on.
.
2. Press the MENU button.
Turn the f knob counterclockwise.
3. Press the H button to display HR, MIN, MM, DD,
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day to day/month:
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year).
4. Press the softkey located under any one of the
tabs to change that setting.
1. Press the MENU button and then the softkey under
the H tab.
5. To increase the time or date, do one of the
following:
2. Press the softkey located below the forward arrow
tab. 12H, 24H, the date MM/DD (month and day),
and DD/MM/ (day and month) displays.
.
Press the softkey below the selected tab.
.
Press the ¨ SEEK button.
3. Press the softkey located below the desired option.
.
Press the \ FWD button.
4. Press the MENU button again to apply the desired
option, or let the screen time out.
.
Turn the f knob clockwise.
4-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio(s)
Radio with CD (MP3) shown, Radio with USB and CD
(MP3), and Radio with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3)
similar
AM-FM Radio
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios with CD and DVD
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features are explained later
in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑132 for more
information on the vehicle's RSE system.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital
Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.).
Radio with USB, CD, and DVD (MP3)
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio
system.
4-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle's speed changes while
driving, so that the volume level stays consistent.
Radio Data System (RDS)
For radios with the Radio Data System (RDS) feature, it
only works with FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works when
the information is available. While the radio is tuned to
an FM-RDS station, the station name or call letters
displays. In rare cases, a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the radio features to
work improperly. If this happens, contact the radio
station.
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the softkey under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) tab on the radio display.
Playing the Radio
4. Press the softkey under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
(Information) (AM-FM Radio): Press to switch the
display between the radio station frequency and the
time. While the ignition is off, press this button to
display the time.
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™,
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3, and
RDS Features): Press to switch the display between
the radio station frequency and the time. When the
if equipped.
ignition is in the OFF position, press 4 to display the
time. For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or RDS
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨ : Press either arrow to go to the previous
or to the next station and stay there. The radio only
seeks and scans stations with a strong signal that are in
the selected band.
features, press 4 to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD,
MP3 or WMA song. If information is available during
XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line of the display and
artist information displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO INFO” displays.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station.
Setting Preset Stations
Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
If the radio does not have a FAV button, up to
18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons. To
program presets:
For the AM-FM Radio, the station frequency flashes
while the radio is in the scan mode.
For the AM-FM Radio, scan presets within the current
selected band by pressing and holding either seek
arrow for four seconds until a double beep sounds. The
radio goes to a stored preset, plays for a few seconds if
a strong signal is present, then goes to the next stored
preset. The station frequency flashes while the radio is
in the scan mode.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons for three seconds until a beep sounds.
Whenever that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
5. Repeat the Steps 2 through 4 for each pushbutton.
4-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold one of the six softkeys until a beep
sounds. When that softkey is pressed and
released, the station that was set, returns.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Radios that have a FAV button store radio stations as
favorites.
4. Repeat the steps for each softkey radio station to
store as a favorite.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See
Defensive Driving on page 5‑2.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
FAV (Favorites): If the vehicle has a FAV button, a
maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as
favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station
frequency tabs and by using the FAV button. Press the
FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM, if equipped, stations.
2. Press the softkey located below the FAV 1-6 tab.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the softkey located below the displayed
page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency tabs and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
the station will be stored.
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Adjust the setting by doing one of the following:
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
(AM-FM Radio)
.
Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise.
.
Bass/Treble: To adjust the bass or treble, press the
tune knob or the EQ button until the desired tone
control tab displays. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the setting.
The display shows the current bass or treble level. If a
station's frequency is weak, or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
Press the ¨ SEEK, or © SEEK button.
.
Press the \ FWD, or s REV button.
If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the softkey positioned under the BASS,
MID, or TREB tab for more than two seconds. A beep
sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble)
(All Except AM-FM Radio)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble:
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
1. Press the f knob until the tone control tabs
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
display.
2. Highlight the desired tone control tab by doing one
of the following:
.
Pressing the f knob.
.
Press the softkey under the desired tab.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
4-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade
on radios without a ` button, press the f knob until
the speaker control tabs display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey under the
` (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance or fade for
radios with a ` button, press this button or the tune
knob until the desired speaker control tab displays. Turn
the tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the setting.
The setting can also be adjusted by pressing the seek
arrows.
desired tab. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting,
or adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM
stations when the radio is in the XM mode. To find XM
channels within a desired category:
SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the
desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the softkey positioned under the BAL or FADE tab
for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category tabs. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
.
Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
two seconds.
category list by pressing the \ FWD or the
s REV button.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category tab to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK
arrow to go to the previous or to the next XM
station within the selected category.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer for service.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display the favorites
again.
Locked or Loc : One of these messages will display
when the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the
radio. Take the vehicle to your dealer for service.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer.
2. Press the softkey located below the XM CAT tab.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
removed.
4. Press the softkey located under the Remove tab
until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
softkey under the Add tab when a removed category is
displayed or by pressing the softkey under the Restore
All tab.
Radio Messages for XM Only
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
See XM Radio Messages on page 4‑120 later in this
section for further detail.
4-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Care of CDs and DVDs
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R or CD-RW has been
handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
or DVD player scans the bottom surface of the disc.
If the surface of a CD or DVD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD or DVD does not
play properly or not at all. Do not touch the bottom side
of a CD or DVD while handling it; this could damage the
surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD
optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player
mechanism.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt
is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD
player, use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the surface of a CD or DVD is soiled, clean it with a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a
mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with water. Make
sure the wiping process starts from the center to
the edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is
turned on, the CD starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
Inserting a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Inserting a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press to load CDs into the CD player. This
CD player holds up to six CDs.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To insert one CD:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
Ejecting a Disc
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to eject
the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from a
radio with CD/MP3/DVD and USB, ejects from the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into
the player.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. To
insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
Z button or the DISP knob.
4-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin playing).
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release to eject
the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting from a
radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom slot.
A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc can be
removed. If the disc is not removed, after several
seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into the
player.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source. The CD is
controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by
the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on
page 4‑141 for more information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as with an unknown format error, etc., and the disc
fails to eject, press and hold for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
When a CD is inserted, the text tab DVD or CD symbol
displays on the left side of the radio display. As each
new track starts to play, the track number displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
currently playing.
© SEEK ¨ : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD
have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller
CDs are loaded in the same manner.
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than
For the Radio with CD (MP3), Radio with USB and CD
(MP3), and the Radio with USB, CD and DVD (MP3):
five seconds on the CD have played. If less than
five seconds on the CD have played, the previous track
plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
1. Press the CD/AUX or DVD/CD AUX button when
not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into
the slot of the CD player. A RDM tab displays.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
2. Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab
until Random Current Disc displays.
3. Press the softkey again to turn off random play.
For the Radio with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3):
1. Press the CD/AUX button when not sourced to the
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
CD, or press and hold the ^ button. A beep
sounds and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or
more discs partway into the slot of the CD player.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound will be heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
2. Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab
until Randomize All Discs displays to play tracks
from all CDs loaded in random order.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order. To use random, do one of the following:
3. Press the softkey positioned under the RDM tab
until Random Current Disc displays to play tracks
from a single CD in random order.
For the AM-FM Radio with CD:
4. Press the same softkey again to turn off
random play.
1. Press the RDM button to play tracks from the CD
in random order. The random icon displays.
2. Press the RDM button again to turn off random
play. The random icon disappears from the display.
4-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RPT (Repeat): For the AM-FM Radio with CD, press
and release the RPT button to repeat the current track.
An arrow symbol displays. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the
radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a message showing
the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in
either slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑132 for more
information.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
radio when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or DVD
remains inside the radio for future listening or for
viewing entertainment.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only) through
the remote control.
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is defined as
DVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack,
or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
The Radio with CD (MP3), Radio with USB and CD
(MP3), and Radio with USB and Six-Disc CD (MP3)
have the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) on
page 4‑105 or Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD)
on page 4‑112 for more information.
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the DVD/
CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front or rear
auxiliary input (if available).
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
Radios with CD and DVD has the capability of playing
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more
information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) on
page 4‑105 or Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD)
on page 4‑112 for more information.
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the front
seat passengers are able to listen to playback from this
source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using the
Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/
Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System on page 4‑132 for more information.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is turned
on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑141 for more
information.
4-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radios with a CD and DVD player may display other
messages when an error occurs:
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑132
and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑141 for more
information.
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
.
It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
.
The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/
RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMA
formats.
.
The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under, Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑132 and
“DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for more
information.
.
There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
.
The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If the radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The
parental control feature remains on until the knob is
pressed and held for more than two seconds again,
or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the
vehicle.
Playing a DVD
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the
radio. The DVD/CD text tab and a message showing
track or chapter number displays when a disc is in
either slot. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources
and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a front
auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button
cycles through all available options, such as: DVD slot,
CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4‑132 for more
information.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or
date settings, while in the clock or date setting mode.
See the information given earlier in this section specific
to the radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the
Time” in the index, for setting the clock and date.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press the right arrow
to go to the next track or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn this
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume. Press and hold for more than
two seconds to turn off the entire radio and Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system and to start the parental
control feature. Parental control prevents the rear seat
occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
system or remote control.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
4-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or
the previews.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD or DVD. If a CD or
DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the softkey located under the
play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If the
DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails
to eject, press and hold for more than five seconds to
force the disc to eject.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
softkey located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for more
information.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the softkeys
located under the navigation arrows to navigate the
cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection
press this button. This button only operates when using
a DVD.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) System on page 4‑132 for more information. The
Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
q Group r : Press to cycle through musical
groupings on the DVD-A disc.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu and
return to the previous menu. This button operates only
when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the softkeys
located under any desired tag option during DVD
playback. See the tag options listed after, for more
information.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and show “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display, which requires the Play, Enter,
or Navigation softkeys to be pressed; either by softkey
or by the rear seat passenger using the remote control.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 4‑132 for more information. The Video Screen
does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned
on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control
power button.
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forward
arrow is showing on the display, the system is in pause
mode. If the pause icon is showing on the display, the
system is in playback mode.
4-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press and hold
Stopping and Resuming Playback
the DVD Z button more than five seconds to force the
disc to eject.
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
softkey located under the stop or the play/pause symbol
tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is sourced
to something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD
AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the
disc is damaged.
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button on
the remote control, or press the softkey located under
the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. The
DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if
the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has
not been pressed twice on the remote control. If the
disc has been ejected or the stop button has been
pressed twice on the remote control, the disc resumes
playing at the beginning of the disc.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Ejecting a Disc
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as an
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as
another source for audio listening.
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the
radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The
disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not resume
play of the disc automatically. If the RSA system is
sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into the
DVD player begins to play again. In case loading and
reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed (unknown
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving
on page 5‑2 for more information on driver distraction.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to cycle through
DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The
DVD/CD text tab and a message showing track or
chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot.
Press again and the system automatically searches for
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No
Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and
Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 4‑132 for more information.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over the
vehicle speakers.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device's volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might have to be made from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
Using the USB Port
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing.
Radios with a USB port can control a USB storage
device or an iPod® using the radio buttons and knobs.
See Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) on page 4‑105 or
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD) on
page 4‑112 for information about how to connect and
control a USB storage device or an iPod.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and the
system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
4-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB Support
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD)
Format
The USB connector is located on the dashboard or in
the center console, and uses the USB 2.0 standard.
Radios that have the capability of playing MP3s can
play.mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R
or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the
following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate.
USB Supported Devices
.
USB Flash Drives
.
Portable USB Hard Drives
.
Fifth generation or later iPod
.
iPod nanos
.
Radios that have a USB port can play.mp3 and .wma
files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as
AAC files that are stored on an iPod®.
iPod touch
.
iPod classic
Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the
USB port.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple®
for proper operation. iPod firmware can be updated
using the latest iTunes® application. See
www.apple.com/itunes.
The radio can play discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats
are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files first, then
the uncompressed CD audio files.
For help with identifying your iPod, go to
www.apple.com/support.
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File and Folder
Root Directory
Structure
The root directory is treated as a folder. Files are stored
in the root directory when the disc or storage device
does not contain folders. Files accessed from the root
directory of a CD display as F1 ROOT.
The radio supports:
.
Up to 50 folders.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Empty Folder
.
Up to 50 playlists.
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
.
Up to 255 files.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
Order of Play
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
Compressed audio files are accessed in the following
order:
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
.
The radio supports:
Playlists (Px).
.
.
Up to 700 folders.
Files stored in the root directory.
.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Files stored in folders in the root directory.
.
Up to 65,535 files.
Tracks are played in the following order:
.
.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
.
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
FAT16
.
.
FAT32
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
4-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
and files, the player allows access and navigates up to
the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not
accessible.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently
playing.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. The display does not show parts of
words on the last page of text and the extension of the
filename is not displayed.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
Preprogrammed Playlists
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
CDs that have preprogrammed playlists that were
created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, there is
no playlist editing capability using the radio. These
playlists are treated as special folders containing
compressed audio song files.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Release s REV to resume playing.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to
advance playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
the © SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that
have been recorded without using file folders can be
played. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey
below S c to go to the first track in the previous
folder.
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
desired artist displays.
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW can
be listened to in random, rather than sequential order,
on one CD-R or CD-RW or all discs in a six-disc CD
player. To use random, press the softkey under the
RDM tab until Random Current Disc or Randomize All
Discs displays to play songs from the current CD or all
CDs in random order. Press the same softkey again to
turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to have the files played in order by artist or album. The
player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on
the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is
scanning in the background.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begins to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located in the center console or on the
instrument panel.
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located in
the center console or on the instrument panel. If the
vehicle is on and the USB connection works, “OK to
disconnect” and a GM logo may appear on the iPod and
iPod appears on the radio display. The iPod music
appears on the radio’s display and begins playing.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
of the file displays.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. To
browse and select files:
1. Press the softkey below c.
To use the softkeys:
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is
more then one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until
the desired folder is reached.
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
folder.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's
menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
.
.
Playlists
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
.
.
.
.
.
softkey is pressed.
Artists
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
Albums
Genres
Songs
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
Composers
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
To select files:
Repeat Functionality
1. Press the softkey below h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press f to select the desired menu.
To use Repeat:
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
selected menu.
5. Press f to select the desired file to be played.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shuffle Functionality
Using an MP3 (Radios with CD
and DVD)
To use Shuffle:
Press the softkey below >, 2, < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
Format
The radio can play.mp3 or .wma files that were
recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
> (Shuffle Off): Press the softkey below 2 to turn
shuffle off. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
The USB port can play.mp3 and .wma files that are
stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files
that are stored on an iPod®.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Press the
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
softkey below = or < to shuffle all songs on the
USB storage device or iPod.
The radio plays discs that contain both uncompressed
CD audio and MP3/WMA files depending on which slot
the disc is loaded into.
< (Shuffle Album): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current album on an iPod.
The DVD Player only reads uncompressed audio and
ignores MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.
= (Shuffle Folder): Press the softkey below > to
shuffle all songs in the current folder on a USB storage
device.
The CD Player reads both uncompressed audio and
MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc. Uncompressd
audio is played before MP3/WMA files. Press the CAT
(category) button to toggle between uncompressed
audio and MP3/WMA files.
4-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported File and Folder
USB Supported File and Folder Structure
Structure
The radio supports:
.
The DVD Player supports:
Up to 700 folders.
.
.
Up to 255 folders.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
.
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
Up to 65,535 files.
.
.
Up to 15 playlists.
Folder and file names up to 64 bytes.
.
.
Up to 40 sessions.
Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension.
.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
AAC files stored on an iPod.
.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
FAT16
.
The CD Player supports:
FAT32
.
Up to 512 files and folders.
Root Directory
.
Up to 8 folders in depth.
The root directory of the disc is treated as a folder. If the
root directory has compressed audio files, the directory
displays as F1 ROOT on the radio.
.
Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension.
.
Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio and
MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tracks are played in the following order:
Empty Folder
.
Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the
player advances to the next folder that contains files.
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
No Folder
When the disc contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a disc that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
.
Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
When the disc contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists first and then goes to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
Order of Play
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Compressed audio files are accessed in the following
order:
.
Playlists.
.
Files stored in the root directory.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text
and the extension of the filename does not display.
.
Files stored in folders in the root directory.
4-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preprogrammed Playlists
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using
the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders
containing compressed audio song files.
Release s REV to resume playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume and the elapsed time of the file displays.
Playlists that have an .m3u or .pls file extension and are
stored on a USB device may be supported by the radio
with a USB port.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the softkey
below S c to go to the first track in the previous
folder.
Playing an MP3/WMA File From a Disc
(In Either the DVD or CD Slot)
If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only).
c T (Next Folder): Press the softkey below c T to
go to the first track in the next folder.
RDM (Random): Files on the disc can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To use random,
press the softkey under the RDM tab until Random
Current Disc displays to play songs in random order.
Press the same softkey again to turn off random play.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMA files.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if less
than five seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times, if more than five seconds have played,
to continue moving backward through tracks.
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to play files in order by artist or album.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and
album ID3 tag information. It can take several minutes
to scan the disc depending on the number of files on
the disc. The radio may begin playing while it is
scanning in the background.
4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files
in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on
the second line of the display. Once all songs by that
artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist.
Connecting a USB Storage Device
or iPod®
The USB Port can be used to control an iPod or a USB
storage device.
To listen to files by another artist, press the softkey
located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the
next or previous artist in alphabetical order. Continue
pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the
artist displays.
To connect a USB storage device, connect the device to
the USB port located in the center console or on the
instrument panel.
To connect an iPod, connect one end of the USB cable
that came with the iPod to the iPod’s dock connector
and connect the other end to the USB port located in
the center console or on the instrument panel. If the
vehicle is on and the USB connection works, “OK to
disconnect” and a GM logo may appear on the iPod and
iPod appears on the radio display. The iPod music
appears on the radio’s display and begins playing.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album:
1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab.
2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab
from the sort screen.
3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to
the main music navigator screen.
The iPod charges while it is connected to the vehicle if
the vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN
position. When the vehicle is turned off, the iPod
automatically powers off and will not charge or draw
power from the vehicle's battery.
The album name displays on the second line between
the arrows and songs from the current album begin to
play. Once all songs from that album have played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD and begins playing MP3 files from that album.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported, it
can still be used by connecting it to the Auxiliary Input
Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable. See
“Using the Auxiliary Input Jack” earlier for more
information.
To exit music navigator mode, press the softkey below
the Back tab to return to normal MP3 playback.
4-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Radio to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
Using Softkeys to Control a USB
Storage Device or iPod
The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod
using the radio buttons and knobs and display song
information on the radio’s display.
The five softkeys below the radio display are used to
control the functions listed below.
To use the softkeys:
f (Tune): Turn to select files.
1. Press the first or fifth softkey below the radio
display to display the functions listed below,
or press the softkey below the function if it is
currently displayed.
© SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press
multiple times to continue moving backward through
tracks.
2. Press the softkey below the tab with the function
on it to use that function.
¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold
or press multiple times to continue moving forward
through tracks.
j (Pause): Press the softkey below j to pause the
track. The tab appears raised when pause is being
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
used. Press the softkey below j again to resume
playback.
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time
Back: Press the softkey below the back tab to go back
to the main display screen on an iPod, or the root
directory on a USB storage device.
of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly. Sound is heard at a reduced volume.
Release \ FWD to resume playing. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
4 (Information): Press to display additional information
about the selected track.
4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view
the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. To
browse and select files:
h (Music Navigator): Press the softkey below h
to view and select a file on an iPod, using the iPod's
menu system. Files are sorted by:
.
Playlists
1. Press the softkey below c.
.
Artists
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of folders.
.
Albums
3. Press f to select the folder. If there is more than
one folder, repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the folder is
reached.
.
Genres
.
Songs
.
Composers
4. Turn f to scroll through the files in the selected
To select files:
folder.
1. Press the softkey below h.
2. Turn f to scroll through the list of menus.
3. Press f to select the menu.
5. Press f to select the file to be played.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
4. Turn f to scroll through the folders or files in the
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
selected menu.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
5. Press f to select the file to be played.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
4-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used
to navigate in the following order:
Shuffle Functionality
To use Shuffle:
.
First softkey, first item in the list.
Press the softkey below >, 2, < or = to
select between Shuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle
Songs, Shuffle Album, or Shuffle Folder.
.
Second softkey, 1% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
.
Third softkey, 5% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
> (Shuffle Off): This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
.
Fourth softkey, 10% through the list each time the
softkey is pressed.
2 (Shuffle All Songs / Shuffle Songs): Shuffles all
songs on the USB storage device or iPod.
.
Fifth softkey, end of the list.
< (Shuffle Album): Shuffles all songs in the current
Repeat Functionality
album on an iPod.
To use Repeat:
= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles all songs in the current
folder on a USB storage device.
Press the softkey below " or ' to select between
Repeat All and Repeat Track.
" (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat
all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is
being used. This is the default mode when a USB
storage device or iPod is first connected.
' (Repeat Track): Press the softkey below ' to
repeat one track. The tab appears raised when Repeat
Track is being used.
4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer's request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Title Info: No song title information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could
have previously been in another vehicle. For security
purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped between
vehicles. If this message is received after having the
vehicle serviced, check with your dealer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth : This channel is blocked or cannot
be received with your XM Subscription package.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult with
your dealer.
4-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to
interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and
name tags.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
Bluetooth®
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make
and receive phone calls. The system can be used while
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m
(30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all
phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
Audio System
When using the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle's front audio system
speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the
audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the
volume level. The adjusted volume level remains in
memory for later calls. To prevent missed calls, a
minimum volume level is used if the volume is turned
down too low.
4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Controls
.
Up to five cell phones can be paired to the
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
Steering Wheel Controls on page 4‑143 for more
information.
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system.
.
.
The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
b g (Push To Talk) : Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
.
.
Only one paired cell phone can be connected to
the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in‐vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
Hands‐Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner's guide for more information.
4-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on this
process.
Deleting a Paired Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
delete followed by a tone.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>? Yes
or No” followed by a tone.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
4-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Linking to a Different Phone
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
.
If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
.
.
If another phone is not found, the original
If the system recognizes the number it
phone remains connected.
responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the
phone number.
Storing Name Tags
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re‐entered.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
.
Store
.
Digit Store
.
Directory
4-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
“No” and repeat Step 5.
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Using the Digit Store Command
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that
sound OK?”.
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
.
If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
4-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete, <name
tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the
main menu.”
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
.
If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The
system responds with “No. OK, let's try again,
please say the name tag.”
Deleting Name Tags
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
.
Delete
To use the delete all name tags command:
.
Delete all name tags
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
To use the delete command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
.
Say “No” to cancel the function and return to
the main menu.
4-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Making a Call
Calls can be made using the following commands:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
.
.
.
.
Dial
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
Digit Dial
Call
Re‐dial
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>”. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
.
If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
number.
.
If the system recognizes the number, it
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
.
To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
number.
will repeat them.
.
If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re‐entered.
4-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Call Command
Using the Re‐dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial”. The system responds
with “Re‐dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling, <name
tag>” and dials the number. If the name tag is
not correct, say “No”. The system will ask for
the name tag to be re‐entered.
.
Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
.
Press c x to ignore a call.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
4-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
.
Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
Ending a Call
Press c x to end a call.
.
Press b g again to return to the original call.
To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
Muting a Call
.
original call with no action.
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
.
Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
To Mute a call
Three‐Way Calling
Three‐Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
1. While on a call press b g. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To Cancel Mute
2. Say “Three‐way call”. The system responds with
“Three‐way call, please say dial or call”.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
4-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Transferring a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
Audio can be transferred between the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
Voice Pass‐Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
.
The cell phone's normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone's
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY position.
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is used
when calling a menu driven phone system. Account
numbers can be programmed into the phonebook for
retrieval during menu driven calls.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
4-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to send.
Sending a Number During a Call
.
If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call
continues.
3. Say the number to send.
.
If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
.
If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in‐vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and
phone pairing information. For information on how to
delete this information, see the above sections on
Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
1. Press b g. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑18 for FCC
information.
4-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parental Control
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To start
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicle's audio system. The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a
DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks,
two wireless headphones, and a remote control. See
Radio(s) on page 4‑85 for more information on the
vehicle's audio/DVD system.
The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
the power button, but the RSE system will remain under
Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the
padlock icon disappears from the radio display.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. The
driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving
and should not try to do so.
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the radio
DVD display menu, or changing an ignition position.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the RSE
system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below 140°F (60°C).
If the temperature of the vehicle is outside of this range,
heat or cool the vehicle until the temperature is within
the operating range of the RSE system.
4-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The headphones may automatically turn off after
four hours of continuous use.
Headphones
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones can
used to listen to the radio, CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs,
any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the
auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The
wireless headphones have an On/Off button,
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. Headphones should be worn with
headband over the top of the head for best audio
reception. The symbol L (Left) appears on the upper left
side, above the ear pad and should be positioned on
the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears on the upper
right side, above the ear pad and should be positioned
on the right ear.
channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An
indicator light located on the headphones comes on.
If the light comes on but, there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator light
does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. Switch the headphones to
Off when not in use.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. Refer to your dealer
for more information.
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE
system and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are
out of range of the transmitters for more than
three minutes. If you move too far forward or step out of
the vehicle, the headphones lose the audio signal.
4-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from an
auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video game
unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors or cables
(not included) may be required to connect the auxiliary
device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for proper usage.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry
place.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio
system.
4-134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks
and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen
power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player
mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the
remote control switches the video screen from the DVD
player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen
to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by
sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 4‑85 for
more information.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
.
Wireless Headphones
.
Vehicle Speakers
.
Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available.
See “Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change
any feature, do the following:
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system. See
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4‑141 for more
information.
1. Press the z (display) menu button on the remote
control.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio's auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this
feature, the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio
from the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
2. Use the remote control menu n, q, p, o
(navigation) arrows and the r (enter) button to
use the setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
4-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console and
press the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright
light could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to
receive signals from the remote control. If the remote
control does not seem to be working, the batteries might
need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
affect the function of the remote control.
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on. This is normal, and the
DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject
the disc to turn off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control O (power) button can be used to turn on the
video screen display and start the disc. The radio can
also turn on the video screen display. See Radio(s) on
page 4‑85 for more information.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear of
the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs will
not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme
cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the remote
control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as
damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses
a code set of Toshiba®.
4-136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically times
out after seven to ten seconds if no other button is
pressed while the backlight is on.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause
it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function could vary for
each disc.
While the DVD is playing, the DVD can be played
slowly by pressing the play/pause button then pressing
the fast forward button. The DVD continues playing in a
slow play mode. Also, reverse can be played slowly by
pressing the play/pause button and then pressing the
fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press
the play/pause button.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use
the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the
DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or chapter.
This button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
4-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to the
beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might
not work while the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to quickly reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play/pause button. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release the fast reverse button. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature while a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward the
DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press
the play/pause button. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
audio or CD, release the fast forward button. This
button might not work while the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track number
selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical
inputs.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio tracks on
DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function vary for
each disc.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to select
chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press this
button before entering the number.
4-138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
Battery Replacement
Problem
Recommended Action
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on the remote control.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure they are installed correctly using the
diagram on the inside of the remote control.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
3. Replace the battery cover.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry
place.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player,
If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player resumes playing
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times the
DVD player begins to play
from the beginning of
the DVD.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
it looks stretched out.
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
4-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)
DVD Display Error Messages
The DVD display error message depends on the radio
that is in the vehicle. The video screen can display one
of the following:
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions, low
headphone audio cuts out batteries, reception range,
or buzzes.
and interference from
cellular telephone towers or
by using a cellular
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays when
there are disc load or eject problems.
telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones
are on correctly using the
L (left) and R (right) on the
headphones.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if the
disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer for
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the
radio.
headphones.
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
DVD Distortion
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
4-140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio functionality is controlled by both the RSA
and the front radio. Only one band can be tuned to at
one time. Changing the band on the RSA or the front
radio will change the band on the other system, if they
are both sourced to the radio.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
Cleaning the Video Screen
The RSA functions can be used even while the main
radio is off. The front audio system will display the
headphone icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear
from the display when it is off.
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could
result.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not
included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If the
vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat
passengers to listen to and control any of the music
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control the
music sources the front seat passengers are not
listening to (except on some radios where dual control
is allowed). For example, rear seat passengers can
control and listen to a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of the
volume for each set of headphones.
Depending on the audio system, the rear speakers may
continue to play when the RSA audio is active through
the headphones.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through the
RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the front
auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
4-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™
(if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the
previous or to the next station or channels and stay
there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the left seek arrow to go
back to the start of the current track or chapter (if more
than ten seconds have played). Press the right seek
arrow to go the next track or chapter on the disc. This
function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
P (Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on or off.
Volume: Turn the volume knob to increase or to
decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left
knob controls the left headphones and the right knob
controls the right headphones.
While a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left or
right on the menu.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if the
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main radio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
4-142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the CD or DVD audio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle's options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the
While a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer, press
this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are
loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
steering wheel.
While a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, Enter.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle's radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
w / x (Next / Previous): Press to select preset or
favorite radio stations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or to
navigate an iPod® or USB device.
4-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio
Navigating folders on an iPod or USB
Device (Vehicles without a Navigation
System):
To select preset or favorite radio stations:
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous
radio station stored as a preset or favorite.
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
CD/DVD
To select tracks on a CD/DVD:
2. Press and hold x to go back to the previous
folder list.
Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous
track.
3. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down
the list.
Select tracks on an iPod or USB Device
(Vehicles without a Navigation System)
.
To select a folder, press and hold w, or press
¨ when the folder is highlighted.
1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song
until the contents of the current folder display on
the radio display.
.
To go back further in the folder list, press and
hold x.
2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the
list, then press and hold w, or press ¨ to play the
highlighted track.
4-144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the
Main Audio Screen (Vehicles with a
Navigation System)
Press and release ¨ to move up one track within the
selected category.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
Press and release w or x to select the next or
previous track within the selected category.
For vehicles with Bluetooth or OnStar® systems, press
and hold for longer than two seconds to interact with
those systems. See Bluetooth® on page 4‑121 and the
OnStar Owner's Guide for more information.
Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the
tracks.
c (End): Press to reject an incoming call, or end a
Press and release ¨ to move up one track within the
selected category.
current call.
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front
auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the
Music Navigator Screen (Vehicles with a
Navigation System)
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the Navigation
System manual for more information.
Press and release w or x to select the next or
previous track within the selected category.
Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the
tracks within the selected category.
4-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in
AM, FM, or XM™.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
For vehicles with or without a navigation system:
Press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter while
sourced to the CD or DVD slot.
Press ¨ to select a track or a folder when navigating
folders on an iPod or USB device.
AM
For vehicles with a navigation system:
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is heard, to place
the radio into SCAN mode, a station will play for
five seconds before moving to the next station.
2. To stop the SCAN function, press ¨ again.
While listening to a CD/DVD, press and hold ¨ to
quickly move forward through the tracks. Release to
stop on the desired track.
FM Stereo
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the volume.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
4-146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Fixed Mast Antenna
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills
can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or
standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages,
or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely
attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
Cellular Phone Usage
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's
battery, or simply having the phone on. This
interference causes an increased level of static while
listening to the radio. If static is received while listening
to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the XM
system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
4-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 NOTES
4-148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5 Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Before Leaving on a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Loading the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment . . . . 5-37
Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Driving at Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drunk Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and the
Vehicle
WARNING:
{
Defensive Driving
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 2‑16.
WARNING:
{
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
.
Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
.
Focus on the task of driving.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 4‑37.
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Average reaction time is about three‐fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three‐fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 100 km/h (60 mph) travels
20 m (66 feet). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between the
vehicle and others is important.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road
can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking,
rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake.
The brakes might not have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of
heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent
a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on.
This is normal.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some
power brake assist but it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is used up, it can take
longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light on
page 4‑38
.
Adding non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and
Modifications on page 6‑4.
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10‐second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer for
service.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more
than even the very best braking.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each front
wheel and at both rear wheels.
Brake Assist (Except With 4.3L V6 Engine)
If this vehicle has StabiliTrak®, it also has a Brake
Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping
or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the stability system
hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power
brake system under conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an
attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake control module
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help the
driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to
get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle
until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal pulsations or
pedal movement during this time is normal and the
driver should continue to apply the brake pedal as the
driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature will
automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is
normal.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
The vehicle may have a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak
light along with one of the following messages will be
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off
using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o'clock position
to the three o'clock position. If this clears the
message(s), the vehicle does not need servicing. If this
does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle off,
wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset
the system. If any of these messages still appear on the
DIC, the vehicle should be taken in for service. For
more information on the DIC messages, see DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63.
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the
vehicle on the intended path.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system should
initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately two miles of
driving before the system initializes.
The StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when the
system is both on and
activated.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak
activates, the cruise control automatically disengages.
The cruise control can be re-engaged when road
conditions allow. See Cruise Control on page 4‑7 for
more information.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in
Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 5‑27.
The traction control
disable button is located
on the instrument panel
below the climate
controls.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system is
automatically disabled, the StabiliTrak light comes on
and the STABILITRAK OFF message will appear on the
DIC. Both traction control and StabiliTrak are
The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off
by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if both
systems (traction control and StabiliTrak) were
previously on. To disable both TCS and StabiliTrak,
press and hold the button for five seconds.
automatically disabled in this condition.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
TCS and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and
releasing the StabiliTrak button if not automatically shut
off for any other reason.
When TCS or StabiliTrak is turned off, the StabiliTrak
light and the appropriate message will be displayed on
the DIC to warn the driver. The vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when traction control is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for more
information.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If traction control is turned off, only the
When the traction control system has been turned off,
system noises may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
Locking Rear Axle
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
warning lights and any relevant DIC messages are
displayed, the transfer case could be damaged. The
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the
wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
Steering
Power Steering
If the vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction in
acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration may
be heard. This is normal.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
If cruise control is being used when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise
control will automatically disengage. Cruise control may
be reengaged when road conditions allow. See Cruise
Control on page 4‑7.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system. If the
problem does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle,
see your dealer for service.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because
there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 5‑3. It is better to remove as much speed as
possible from a collision. Then steer around the
problem, to the left or right depending on the space
available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be
turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
.
Look down the road, to the sides, and to
crossroads for situations that might affect a
successful pass. If in doubt, wait.
.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double‐solid line on your
side of the lane.
.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
.
Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
.
When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 inches),
about one-eighth turn, until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle's
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip
and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid,
too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 5‑6. If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an
acceleration skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the
braking skid.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles
with 20‐inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid surface.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off‐road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving skills,
your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you drink
and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control
more limited.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves are
not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces can
be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off‐road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the
front fascia.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
To remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat‐blade tool, disengage the snaps.
Before You Go Off-Roading
.
Have all necessary maintenance and service
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
work done.
.
Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire is
fully inflated.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended periods
without the front fascia lower air dam installed can
cause improper air flow to the engine. Always be
sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you
are finished off-road driving.
.
Be sure to read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
.
Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam:
1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward
to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
.
The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
WARNING:
{
.
Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
.
Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
You will find other important information under Loading
the Vehicle on page 5‑29 and Tires on page 6‑64.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the
environment:
.
.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
.
Always use established trails, roads, and areas
that have been specially set aside for public
off-road recreational driving and obey all posted
regulations.
.
Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb
wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning, breaking
down trees, or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground.
.
Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to
control the speed. At higher speeds:
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle's exhaust system.
.
You approach things faster and have less time to
react.
.
.
There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
Traveling to Remote Areas
The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your route.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to see if
there are any blocked or closed roads.
.
More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
WARNING:
{
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use it
properly.
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you are driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and
close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for
unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for
unusual tire or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands,
feet, and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle
bounce.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle's
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances can occur.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no
road signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use
good judgment about what is safe and what is not.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Driving on Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and
an understanding of what the vehicle can and cannot
do. There are some hills that simply cannot be driven,
no matter how well built the vehicle.
Some things to consider:
.
Is the path ahead clear?
.
Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
WARNING:
{
.
Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
.
Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed. If you
drive across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
quickly?
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with
one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle as
well or at all.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to
judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to the
top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you
near the top, but you might not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
.
Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
.
Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
Consider this as you approach a hill:
WARNING:
{
.
Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
.
Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
.
Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
.
Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
.
your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
.
What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
.
.
Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
.
Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
WARNING:
{
.
While backing down the hill, put your left hand on
the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position so you
can tell if the wheels are straight and can
maneuver as you back down. It is best to back
down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in
the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far
to the left or right will increase the possibility of a
rollover.
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
.
Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
.
Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and could go out of control.
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
.
If the engine is still running, shift the transmission
to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in R (Reverse).
.
Never try to turn around if about to stall when
going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
the vehicle, it is steep enough to cause it to roll
over. If you cannot make it up the hill, back straight
down the hill.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it
rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral
when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large
rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so
engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to
do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the vehicle
under control at all times.
WARNING:
{
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on
the transfer case overrides the transmission. You
or someone else could be injured. If you are going
to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and
shift the transmission to P (Park). But do not shift
the transfer case to Neutral.
WARNING:
{
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
control.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
.
When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
.
How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
maintain vehicle control?
.
What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to the
rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill slide
or a rollover.
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes
and apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
.
.
Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose
gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause
the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle
slips sideways, it can hit something that will
trip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a
hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline,
consider the following:
Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with
the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop
into a rut or depression, the vehicle can tilt
even more.
WARNING:
{
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent this
is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick,
turning is more difficult, and braking distances are
longer.
Stalling on an Incline
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud, keep
the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
WARNING:
{
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes. On
loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand. This
affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive at a
reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control. On
wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you will
have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle does get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause it
to slide out of control.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure
you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side,
even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out
on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over,
you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
WARNING:
{
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on
safe surfaces only.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system
and the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under
water, you will never be able to start the engine. When
going through water, remember that when the brakes
get wet, it might take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain
and on Wet Roads on page 5‑22.
Driving in Water
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
WARNING:
{
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system
for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system
for any leakage.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving at Night
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep‐standing or
flowing water.
Night driving tips include:
.
Drive defensively.
WARNING:
.
{
Do not drink and drive.
.
Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
rearview mirror.
.
Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light
up so much road ahead.
.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal
until the brakes work normally.
Watch for animals.
.
When tired, pull off the road.
.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
.
Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
.
Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
.
Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Things to check on your own include:
Hydroplaning
.
Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle's tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it
has little or no contact with the road.
clean — inside and outside?
.
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
.
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
.
Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
.
Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
.
Allow extra following distance.
.
.
.
.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe
place to park your vehicle and rest.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
Other driving tips include:
.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
on page 6‑64
.
.
Keep interior temperature cool.
.
Turn off cruise control.
.
Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer before departing.
.
Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in
these conditions include:
WARNING:
{
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have to
do all the work of slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and the vehicle in gear when
going downhill.
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
.
Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
.
Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
WARNING:
{
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that
let you stay in your own lane.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
.
.
Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑11 for information
about driving off-road.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The StabiliTrak® System on page 5‑6 improves the
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When
driving through deep snow, turn off the traction control
part of the StabiliTrak® System to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) on page 5‑4
improves vehicle stability during hard stops on slippery
roads, but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
WARNING: (Continued)
use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
.
.
Open a window about 5 cm (two inches) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
.
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
WARNING:
{
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑54.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
.
Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
(Continued)
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle's traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
WARNING:
{
If the vehicle's tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Spin the
wheels as little as possible and avoid going above
55 km/h (35 mph) as shown on the speedometer.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out on page 5‑28.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 6‑89.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles,
shift into Four‐Wheel High. For vehicles with
Recovery Hooks
WARNING:
{
StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control part of the system
off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator
pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes
a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does
not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to
be towed out. Recovery hooks can be used, if the
vehicle has them. If the vehicle does need to be towed
out, see Towing Your Vehicle on page 5‑44.
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire
label.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also
shows the size of the original equipment tires (C)
and the recommended cold tire inflation
Tire and Loading Information Label
pressures (D). For more information on tires and
inflation see Tires on page 6‑64 and Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑73
.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” later
in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle's placard.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver's door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
Example 1
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
SeeTowing a Trailer on page 5‑51 for
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
A
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules and trailering tips.
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Item
Total
1,000 lbs
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
A
(453 kg)
(453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight @ 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Available Cargo
Weight =
Available Cargo
Weight =
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle's
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity
weight.
the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear axles,
you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with this. Be
sure to spread out your load equally on both sides
of the centerline.
Certification/Tire Label
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found
on the rear edge of the driver's door. The label
shows the size of your vehicle's original tires and
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Certification/Tire label also contains important
information about your Front Axle Reserve
Capacity. See “What is front axle reserve capacity,
and how do I calculate it?” under Adding a Snow
WARNING: (Continued)
the way the vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Plow or Similar Equipment on page 5‑37
.
WARNING:
{
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into the passenger
area, injuring you and others. If you put
things in the bed of your truck, you should
make sure they are properly secured.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything
else — they go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you
have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
they will keep going.
WARNING:
{
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
(Continued)
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-Tiered Loading
WARNING:
{
Depending on the model of your pick‐up, you can
create an upper load platform by positioning two
or four 2 inches (5 cm) by 6 inches (15 cm)
wooden planks across the width of the pickup box.
The planks must be inserted in the pickup box
depressions. The length of the planks must allow
for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on
each end of the plank.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
.
Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the
load is securely tied down to prevent it from
shifting. The load's center of gravity should be
positioned in a zone over the rear axle. The zone
is located in the area between the front of each
wheel well and the rear of each wheel well. The
center of gravity height must not extend above the
top of the pickup box flareboard.
.
Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
.
When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
.
Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle's
taillamp area must be properly marked according
to local laws and regulations.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving“ under Off-Road
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
Driving on page 5‑11
.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Loading Points
Add-On Equipment
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you carry inside
your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before
you buy and install the new equipment.
Notice : Overloading the vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not overload the vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
* Equipment
Maximum Weight
Ladder Rack and
Cargo
750 lbs (340 kg)
Cross Toolbox and
Cargo
A. Primary Load Points
400 lbs (181 kg)
B. Secondary Load Areas
Side Boxes and Cargo 250 lbs per side
(113 kg per side)
C. Cargo Management Option Holes
Structural members (A) and (B) are included in the
pick-up box design. Additional accessories should use
these load points. Depending on the accessory design,
use a spacer under the accessory at the load points to
remove gap. The holes for the Cargo Management
System (C) are not intended for attachment of
* The combined weight for all rail‐mounted
equipment should not exceed 1,000 lbs (454 kg).
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
aftermarket equipment. See gmupfitter.com for
additional pick-up box load bearing structural
information.
The plow the vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
.
The options the vehicle came with, and the weight
of those options.
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on the vehicle, here are
some things you need to know:
.
The weight and number of passengers you intend
to carry.
.
The weight of items added to the vehicle, like a
tool box or truck cap.
.
The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
to carry.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow plow
prep package, adding a plow can damage your
vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by
warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry a
snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your
vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called
RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry
will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. Your
vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear
axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) are
exceeded.
Say, for example, you have a 318 kg (700 lb) snow plow.
The total weight of all occupants and cargo inside the
cab should not exceed 135 kg (300 lb). This means that
you may only be able to carry one passenger. But, even
this may be too much if you have got other equipment
already adding to the weight of the vehicle.
Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep
package, called RPO VYU. If your vehicle has this
option, you can add a plow to it, provided certain
weights, such as the weights on the vehicle's axles and
the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW), are not exceeded.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow
plow on the vehicle:
Front axle reserve capacity is the difference between
your the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) and the
front axle weight of the vehicle with full fuel and
passengers. Basically, it is the amount of weight that
can be added to the front axle before reaching the
front GAWR.
.
Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles
does not exceed the axle rating for each.
.
For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must
be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast
must be properly secured so it will not move during
driving.
The front axle reserve capacity for the vehicle can be
found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label, as shown.
.
Follow the snow plow manufacturer's
recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear
ballast may be required to ensure a proper front
and rear weight distribution ratio, even though the
actual weight at the front axle may be less than the
front axle rating.
.
The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist
you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure the snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating, the
front and rear axle ratings, and the front and rear
weight distribution ratio.
United States
Canada
.
The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the
front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
For example, adding a 318 kg (700 lb) snow plow
actually adds more than 318 kg (700 lbs) to the front
axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 122 cm (4 ft)
in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 305 cm
(10 ft), then:
W = 318 kg (700 lb)
A = 122 cm (4 ft)
W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)
(W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 445 kg
(980 lbs)
So, if the front axle reserve capacity is more than
445 kg (980 lbs), you could add the snow plow without
exceeding the front GAWR.
(W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding
to the front axle.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo toward
the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on the
front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be
exceeded.
Total vehicle reserve capacity is the difference between
the GVWR and the weight of the truck with full fuel and
passengers. It is the amount of weight that can be
added to the vehicle before reaching the GVWR. Keep
in mind that reserve capacity numbers are intended as
a guide when selecting the amount of equipment or
cargo the truck can carry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,
rear, or total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh the
vehicle. Your dealer can also help with this.
WARNING:
{
The total vehicle reserve capacity for the vehicle can be
found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label as shown previously.
On some vehicles that have certain front mounted
equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be
possible to load the front axle to the front gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enough
weight on the rear axle to have proper braking
performance. If your brakes can not work properly,
you could have a crash. To help your brakes work
properly when a snow plow is installed, always
follow the snow plow manufacturer or installer's
recommendation for rear ballast to ensure a
proper front and rear weight distribution ratio,
even though the actual front weight may be less
than the front GAWR, and the total vehicle weight
is less than the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). Maintaining a proper front and rear
weight distribution ratio is necessary to provide
proper braking performance.
See your dealer for additional advice and information
about using a snow plow on the vehicle. Also, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29.
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package,
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is
provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary
Roof-Mounted Lamp on page 4‑14 for switch location.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to the Truck-Camper Loading Information
label in the glove box for dimensions A and B as
shown in the following illustration.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
A vehicle specific Truck‐Camper Loading
information label is attached to the inside of your
vehicle's glove box. This label will tell you if your
vehicle can carry a slide-in camper, how much of
a load your vehicle can carry, and how to correctly
spread out the load. Also, it will help you match
the right slide-in camper to your vehicle.
When you carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo
load of your vehicle is the weight of the camper,
plus the following:
.
Everything else added to the camper after it
left the factory
.
Use the rear edge of the load floor for
Everything in the camper
measurement purposes. The recommended
location for the cargo center of gravity is at
point C for the CWR. It is the point where the
mass of a body is concentrated and, if suspended
at that point, would balance the front and rear.
.
All the people inside
The Cargo Weight Rating (CWR) is the maximum
weight of the load your vehicle can carry. It does
not include the weight of the people inside. But,
you can figure about 150 lbs (68 kg) for each seat.
The total cargo load must not be more than your
vehicle's CWR.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is an example of proper truck and camper
match:
and the camper's center of gravity (A) should fall
within the truck's recommended center of gravity
zone (B) when installed.
You must weigh any accessories or other
equipment that you add to your vehicle. Then,
subtract this extra weight from the CWR. This
extra weight may shorten the center of gravity
zone of your vehicle. Your dealer can help you
with this.
If your slide-in camper and its load weighs less
than the CWR, the center of gravity zone for your
vehicle may be larger.
Your dealer can help you make a good
vehicle-camper match and help you determine
the CWR.
A. Camper Center of Gravity
B. Recommended Center of Gravity
Location Zone
After you have loaded your vehicle and camper,
drive to a weigh station and weigh the front and
rear wheels separately. This will tell you the loads
on the axles. The loads on the front and rear
axles should not be more than either of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the
axle loads should not be more than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
When the truck is used to carry a slide‐in camper,
the total cargo load of the truck consists of the
manufacturer's camper weight figure, the weight of
installed additional camper equipment not
included in the manufacturer's camper weight
figure, the weight of camper cargo, and the weight
of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load
should not exceed the truck's cargo weight rating
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Open the driver's door and look at the
Certification/Tire label to find out your vehicle's
GAWRs and GVWR.
When you install and load your slide-in camper,
check the manufacturer's instructions.
If you want more information on curb weights,
cargo weights, Cargo Weight Rating and the
correct center of gravity zone for your vehicle,
your dealer can help you. Just ask for a copy of
“Consumer Information, Truck-Camper Loading.”
If your vehicle has gone over the weight ratings,
move or take out some things until all the weight
falls below the ratings.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that
could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the
truck‐camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh
on the front and on the rear wheels separately to
determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should
not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings
(GAWR). The total axle loads should not exceed
your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle
certification label attached to the rear edge of the
driver's door. See “Certification/Tire Label” under
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29 . If weight
ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to
bring all weights below the ratings.
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
We are aware that some vehicle owners might consider
having the pickup box removed and a commercial or
recreational body installed. Owners should be aware
that, as manufactured, there are differences between a
chassis cab and a pickup with the box removed which
could affect vehicle safety. The components necessary
to adapt a pickup to permit its safe use with a
specialized body should be installed by the body
builder.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
.
What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Towing Your Vehicle
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer
or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle
must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on
.
What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how long
they can tow.
page 8‑7
.
.
Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome,
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
Recreational Vehicle Towing
If the vehicle has a two–mode hybrid engine, see the
Two–mode Hybrid manual for more information.
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Long Trip on page 5‑23.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle with
two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle:
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking
brake.
4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3‑36 for the proper procedure to select the
Neutral position for the vehicle.
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow
vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
WARNING:
{
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key — the steering wheel will still turn.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36 for the proper
procedure to take the vehicle out of the Neutral position.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the
Ground)
To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drive vehicle, the vehicle must
be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear
Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this
section for more information.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
WARNING:
{
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front:
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3‑36 for the proper procedure to select the
neutral position for the vehicle.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
8. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑50
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)
.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Two‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicles
WARNING:
{
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 3‑50
.
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer's instructions.
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on
page 3‑36 for the proper procedure to select the
neutral position for the vehicle.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 3‑36.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your dealer
for important information about towing a trailer with
the vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual for more information.
If the vehicle has a two–mode hybrid engine, see the
Two–mode Hybrid manual for more information.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later
in this section.
Do not tow a trailer during break‐in. See New Vehicle
Break-In on page 3‑21 for more information.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and
it has to be used properly.
WARNING:
{
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well or even
at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer for advice and information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
pulling a trailer.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important considerations that have to do with weight:
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
The weight of the trailer
.
The weight of the trailer tongue
.
There are many different laws, including speed
.
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make
sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial
police.
The weight on the vehicle's tires
.
And the weight of the trailering combination
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
.
Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
It depends on how the rig is used. Speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and how much the vehicle
is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend
on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the
amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See
“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for
more information.
in this section.
.
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
.
During the first 500 miles (800 km) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Trailer weight rating (TWR) is calculated assuming the
tow vehicle has only the driver but all required trailering
equipment. Weight of additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle must be
subtracted from the trailer weight rating.
.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the
transmission to a lower gear if the transmission
shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions.
Use the following chart to determine how much the
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and
options.
Weights listed apply for conventional trailers and
fifth-wheel trailers unless otherwise noted.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3LV6 (c)
3.23
3.73
3.23
3.73
3.08
3.08
3.42
4,800 lbs (2 177 kg)
5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
7,400 lbs (3 357 kg)
9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
4.3LV6 (c)
4.8LV8 (c)
4.8LV8
5.3L LMG V8
5.3L LMG V8, K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3LV6 (c)
3.23
3.23
3.73
3.08
3.08
4,400 lbs (1 996 kg)
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
6,200 lbs (2 812 kg)
6,900 lbs (3 130 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
4.8LV8 (c)
4.8LV8
5.3LV8
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
3.42
3.42
3.42
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
6.2LV8
6.2LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
6.2LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
3.42
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.73
3.73
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
10,700 lbs (4 853 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8LV8
3.23
3.73
3.08
3.08
3.08
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.73
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
6,600 lbs (2 994 kg)
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
10,600 lbs (4 808 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
4.8LV8
5.3LV8 (LMG)
5.3LV8 (LMG) K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg (XFE)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.2LV8
6.2LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering Pkg
1500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3LV6 (c)
3.23
3.73
3.23
3.73
3.08
4,700 lbs (2 132 kg)
5,200 lbs (2 359 kg)
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 221 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
4.3LV6 (c)
4.8LV8 (c)
4.8LV8
5.3LV8
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
Axle Ratio
3.08
Maximum Trailer Weight
7,200 lbs (3 266 kg)
GCWR (a)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3LV8 6 Speed Automatic
3.42
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,800 lbs (3 992 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3LV8
3.08
3.08
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Standard Box (b)
4.3LV6 (c)
3.73
3.42
3.08
3.08
3.08
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
7,100 lbs (3 221 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
4.8LV8 (c)
5.3LV8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3LV8 — Conventional Trailer
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box (b)
4.8LV8 (c)
3.42
3.08
3.08
3.08
3.42
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
6,100 lbs (2 767 kg)
6,800 lbs (3 084 kg)
9,600 lbs (4 354 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
5.3LV8 — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
5.3LV8 — Conventional Trailer
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.2LV8 (c)
6.2LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
3.73
3.73
8,900 lbs (4 037 kg)
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
6.2LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (c)
4.8LV8
3.42
3.08
3.08
3.42
3.42
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
6,700 lbs (3 039 kg)
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
6,400 lbs (2 903 kg)
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3LV8
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.2LV8
6.2LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
6.2LV8 NHT Max Trailering
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box (b)
4.3LV6 (c)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
3.73
10,400 lbs (4 717 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
3.73
3.42
3.08
3.08
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
6,300 lbs (2 858 kg)
7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
4.8LV8 (c)
5.3LV8
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
1500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box (b)
5.3LV8 (c)
3.08
3.08
5,800 lbs (2 631 kg)
6,500 lbs (2 948 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Fifth-Wheel Trailer
3.42
3.42
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
15,000 lbs (6 804 kg)
5.3LV8 K5L HD Cooling
Pkg — Conventional Trailer
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
2500 Series 2WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,500 lbs (4 763 kg)
13,000 lbs (5 897 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
2500 Series 2WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0LV8
3.73
4.10
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
12,400 lbs (5 625 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
12,400 lbs (5 625 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Standard Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
12,300 lbs (5 579 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
2500 Series 4WD Regular Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
10,200 lbs (4 627 kg)
12,700 lbs (5 761 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
2500 Series 4WD Extended Cab Long Box HD (d)
3.73
4.10
9,800 lbs (4 445 kg)
12,300 lbs (5 579 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8
2500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Long Box HD (d)
6.0LV8
3.73
4.10
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
12,100 lbs (5 489 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3500 Series 2WD Extended Cab (e)
6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,900 lbs (4 491 kg)
12,400 lbs (5 625 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,500 lbs (4 309 kg)
12,000 lbs (5 443 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3500 Series 2WD Crew Cab (e)
6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,300 lbs (4 218 kg)
11,800 lbs (5 352 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3500 Series 4WD Regular Cab (e)
6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg)
12,500 lbs (5 670 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,700 lbs (4 400 kg)
12,200 lbs (5 534 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR (a)
3500 Series 4WD Extended Cab (e)
3.73
4.10
9,600 lbs (4 355 kg)
12,100 lbs (5 489 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,200 lbs (4 173 kg)
11,700 lbs (5 307 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
3500 Series 4WD Crew Cab (e)
6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)
3.73
4.10
9,400 lbs (4 264 kg)
11,900 lbs (5 398 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
3.73
4.10
9,100 lbs (4 128 kg)
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
16,000 lbs (7 257 kg)
18,500 lbs (8 391 kg)
6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels)
(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
(b) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 1,500 lbs (680 kg) maximum.
(c) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.
(d) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,000 lbs
(1 361 kg) maximum.
(e) Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 percent to 25 percent of trailer weight up to 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg) maximum.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ask your dealer for trailering information or advice,
or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices. See
Customer Assistance Offices on page 8‑6 for more
information.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is very important
because it is also part of the vehicle weight. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will
be riding in the vehicle as well as trailer tongue weight.
Vehicle options, equipment, passengers and cargo in
the vehicle reduce the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer
weight the vehicle can tow. See “Loading the Vehicle”
for more information about the vehicle's maximum load
capacity.
Trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent and fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight
should be 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailer weight
up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type
shown below:
Maximum
Vehicle Series
1500
Hitch Type
Tongue Weight
Weight Carrying
272 kg (600 lbs)
2500HD/3500
1500
Weight Carrying 453 kg (1,000 lbs)
Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)
Weight Distributing 680 kg (1,500 lbs)
2500HD/3500
Fifth Wheel
1500
680 kg (1,500 lbs)
Gooseneck
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
1134 kg
(2,500 lbs)
2500HD
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires
Maximum
Tongue Weight
Vehicle Series
Hitch Type
Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the inflation
pressures found on the Certification label on the drivers
door or see Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29 for more
information. Make sure not to exceed the GVWR limit
for the vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the tow vehicle and
trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the
trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make
sure not to exceed the RGAWR before applying the
weight distribution spring bars.
3500 Single
Rear Wheels
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
1 360 kg
(3,000 lbs)
3500 Dual Rear
Wheels
Fifth Wheel
Gooseneck
1 587 kg
(3,500 lbs)
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will
help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
Weight of the Trailering Combination
It is important that the combination of the tow vehicle
and trailer does not exceed any of its weight
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle's ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue or kingpin weight cannot cause
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). See “Total Weight on the Vehicle's Tires” later
in this section for more information.
ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Trailer Weight
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it is
not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh the tow
vehicle and trailer combination, fully loaded for the trip,
getting individual weights for each of these items.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Weight‐Distributing Hitch Adjustment
The correct hitch equipment helps maintain combination
control. Most small-to-medium trailers can be towed
with a weight carrying hitch which simply features a
coupler latched to the hitch ball. Larger trailers may
require a weight distributing hitch that uses spring bars
to distribute the trailer tongue weight among the two
vehicle and trailer axles. Fifth wheel and gooseneck
hitches may also be used. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” earlier in this section for rating limits with
various hitch types.
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample
room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer
and the bumper.
Consider using sway controls with any trailer. Ask a
trailering professional about sway controls or refer to
the trailer manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions.
A: Body to Ground Distance
B: Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the spring bars
should be adjusted so the distance (A) is the same after
coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle and adjusting the
hitch.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fifth Wheel and Gooseneck Trailering
Safety Chains
Fifth wheel and gooseneck trailers can be used with
many pickup models. These trailers place a
larger percentage of the weight (kingpin weight) on the
tow vehicle than conventional trailers. Make sure this
weight does not cause the vehicle to exceed GAWR
or GVWR.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the
road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
about safety chains may be provided by the hitch
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If the trailer
being towed weighs up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg) with a
factory-installed step bumper, safety chains may be
attached to the attaching points on the bumper,
otherwise, safety chains should be attached to holes on
the trailer hitch platform. Always leave just enough
slack so the combination can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
Fifth wheel or gooseneck kingpin weight should be
15 to 25 percent of the trailer weight up to the maximum
amount specified in the trailering chart for the vehicle.
See “Weight of the Trailer” in this section for more
information.
The hitch should be located in the pickup bed so that its
centerline is over or slightly in front of the rear axle.
Take care that it is not so far forward that it will contact
the back of the cab in sharp turns. This is especially
important for short box pickups. Trailer pin box
extensions and sliding fifth wheel hitch assemblies can
help this condition. There should be at least six inches
of clearance between the top of the pickup box and the
bottom of the trailer shelf that extends over the box.
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at the
end of the shift lever turns
on and off the tow/
haul mode.
Make sure the hitch is attached to the tow vehicle frame
rails. Do not use the pickup box for support.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/
Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer
or a large or heavy load.
This indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on when the tow/
haul mode is on.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs
(900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they
are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on
page 3‑34 for more information.
If the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, the trailer
cannot tap into the vehicle's hydraulic brake system.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least
75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” later in the
section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following
driving conditions:
The trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle's
hydraulic brake system only if:
.
The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
.
The trailer's brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from the vehicle's
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
will not work well or at all.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
.
When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid to
the rear brakes. Use only steel brake tubing to make
the tap.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle’s brake, anti‐lock brake or StabiliTrak
systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system
may not be fully functional or may not function at all.
Make sure all of these systems are fully operational to
ensure full functionality of the ITBC system.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System
The vehicle may have an
Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system for
electric trailer brakes.
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle's
electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn
off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional
only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN.
The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with
electric brakes.
This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control
Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System. The power output to the trailer brakes
is based on the amount of brake pressure being applied
by the vehicle’s brake system. This available power
output to the trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide
range of trailering situations.
WARNING:
{
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBC system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase
in stopping distance or trailer instability which
could result in personal injury or damage to the
vehicle, trailer, or other property. An aftermarket
controller may be available for use with trailers
with surge, air or electric‐over‐hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes
on the trailer and the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle’s brake,
anti‐lock brake and StabiliTrak (if equipped) systems. In
trailering conditions that cause the vehicle’s anti‐lock
brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent to
the trailer's brakes will be automatically adjusted to
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply that
the trailer has the StabiliTrak system.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When trailering, make sure of the following:
Trailer Brake Control Panel
.
The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are
equipped with electric brakes.
.
All applicable local and federal laws and
regulations are followed.
.
All electrical and mechanical connections to the
trailer are made correctly.
.
The trailer’s brakes are in proper working
condition.
.
The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for the
towing condition.
The ITBC system is a factory installed item. Out‐of‐
factory installation of this system should not be
attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the system resulting from out‐of‐factory
installation.
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
The ITBC system has a control panel located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column. See
Instrument Panel (Base/Uplevel Version) on page 1‑2
or Instrument Panel (Premium Version) on page 1‑4
.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever
The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of
output, referred to as trailer gain, available to the
electric trailer brakes and allows manual application of
the trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panel is
used along with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the
DIC to adjust and display power output to the trailer
brakes.
Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer
brakes
All DIC warning and service messages must first be
acknowledged by the driver by pressing the odometer
trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button (if
equipped) before the Trailer Brake Display Page can be
displayed and Trailer Gain can be adjusted.
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the
Trailer Brake Display Page is active. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected
or disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of
the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain
button to cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust.
To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer
Gain setting to 0.0 (zero).
The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 4‑63 for more information.
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power
output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection
and system operational status.
The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by
performing any of the following actions:
.
Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the
odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped).
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly
adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure later in this section.
.
Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the Trailer Brake
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a trailer
with electric brakes is connected. Output to the electric
brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking
present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is
displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting.
Display Page is not currently displayed, pressing a
Trailer Gain button will first recall the current Trailer
Gain setting. After the Trailer Brake Display Page
is displayed, each press and release of the gain
buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain setting to
change.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -“ on the Trailer
Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:
The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
.
No trailer is connected.
.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
A trailer without electric brakes is connected (no
DIC message is displayed).
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering
condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle
loading, trailer loading or road surface conditions
change.
.
A trailer with electric brakes has become
disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
.
There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric
trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best
trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is
over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes. A trailer
that is under-gained may result in not enough trailer
braking. Both of these conditions may result in poorer
stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer.
.
There is a fault in the ITBC system (a SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also be
displayed in the DIC).
Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer
Gain for each towing condition:
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply the
trailer’s electric brakes independent of the vehicle’s
brakes. This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the
trailer brakes. Sliding the lever to the left will apply only
the trailer brakes. The power output to the trailer is
indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page in the DIC.
If the vehicle’s service brakes are applied while using
the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer output
power will be the greater of the two.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working
condition.
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle and
make all necessary mechanical and electrical
connections. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑29 for more information.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer
equipped with electric brakes:
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of
trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel
squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
.
A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be
briefly displayed on the DIC display.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing a
heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the
towing condition.
.
The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear on
the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading,
trailer loading or road surface conditions change or
if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while
towing.
.
In the Trailer Output display on the
DIC, “- - - - - -“ will disappear if there is no
error present. Connecting a trailer without
electric brakes will not clear the six dashed
lines.
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain
adjustment (+ / -) buttons on the Trailer Brake
Control Panel.
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and ITBC
system status is displayed in the DIC.
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level
road surface representative of the towing condition
and free of traffic at about 20 to 25 mph (32 to
40 km/h) and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake
Apply lever.
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be briefly
displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is first
connected to the vehicle. This message will
automatically turn off in about ten seconds. The driver
can also acknowledge this message before it
automatically turns off.
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than 20 to
25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in an incorrect
gain setting.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be
displayed if:
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back
to RUN.
1. The ITBC system first determines connection to a
trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer
harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
re-appears, the electrical fault is on the
vehicle side.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stationary, this message will automatically turn off
in about thirty seconds. This message will also turn
off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if
the trailer harness is re-connected.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only
re-appears when connecting the trailer wiring
harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the
trailer side.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message
will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC
system. If this message persists over multiple ignition
cycles there is a problem with the ITBC system. Take
the vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have the
ITBC system diagnosed and repaired.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message will continue until the ignition
is turned off. This message will also turn off if the
driver acknowledges this message off or if the
trailer harness is re-connected.
2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the
electric trailer brakes. This message will continue
as long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer
wiring. This message will also turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message off.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while
driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to the
trailer brakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefully
pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the
ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer
and turn the ignition back on. If either of these
messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs
service.
To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side
or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the
vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose and
repair problems with the trailer. However, any diagnosis
and repair of the trailer is not covered under the vehicle
warranty. Please contact your trailer dealer for
assistance with trailer repairs and trailer warranty
information.
WARNING: (Continued)
.
Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
.
Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
Driving with a Trailer
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
WARNING:
{
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Engine Exhaust on page 3‑54.
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. The combination you are driving is longer
and not as responsive as the vehicle itself. Get
acquainted with the handling and braking of the rig
before setting out for the open road.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirrors. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the combination moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the
brakes work.
.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting
a trip.
.
Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch,
or rear-most window open.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure and the lamps and any trailer brakes
still work.
(Continued)
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the trailer turn signal bulbs burn out, the arrows on the
instrument panel will still flash for turns. It is important to
check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns.
Driving On Grades
Passing
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might get hot and no
longer work well.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is
longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before returning to the lane.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. To
move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. To
move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have
someone guide you.
The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 3‑34.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a
lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine
is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar
to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park) for a few minutes
before turning the engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating on page 6‑34.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking on Hills
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on
a flat surface.
If the engine has been left running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even
when on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
If the transfer case on a four-wheel-drive vehicle
is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll,
even if the shift lever is in P (Park). Be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in
N (Neutral).
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral).
6. Release the brake pedal.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine
Trailer Wiring Harness
The vehicle is equipped with one of the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer or hauling a slide-in
camper.
3. Shift into a gear
Basic Trailer Wiring
4. Release the parking brake
5. Let up on the brake pedal.
All regular, extended cab and crew cab pickups have a
seven‐wire trailer towing harness.
6. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
For vehicles not equipped with heavy duty trailering, the
harness is secured to the vehicle's frame behind the
spare tire mount. The harness requires the installation
of a trailer connector, which is available through your
dealer.
7. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these
before and during the trip.
If towing a light‐duty trailer with a standard four‐way
round pin connector, an adapter is available from your
dealer.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed*
Heavy-DutyTrailer Wiring Harness
Package
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your dealer or
a qualified service center. The fuse and wire for the
ITBC is factory installed and connected if the vehicle is
equipped with an ITBC. The fuse for the battery feed is
not required if the vehicle has an auxiliary battery. If the
vehicle does not have an auxiliary battery, have your
dealer or authorized service center install the
required fuse.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the
Tow/Haul mode button, if equipped, located at the end
of the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system
voltage and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is
too light for Tow/Haul mode, or the vehicle is not
equipped with Tow/Haul, turn on the headlamps as a
second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the
battery.
For vehicles equipped with heavy duty trailering, the
harness is connected to a bracket on the hitch platform.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
White: Ground
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer Wiring Package
The seven-wire camper harness is located under the
front edge of the pickup box on the drivers side of the
vehicle, attached to the frame bracket. A connector
must be added to the wiring harness which connects to
the camper.
The harness contains the following camper/trailer
circuits:
.
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
.
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
.
Brown: Taillamps
.
White: Ground
.
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
If the vehicle is equipped with the “Heavy-Duty
Trailering” option, please refer to “Heavy-Duty Trailer
Wiring Package” earlier in this section.
.
Red: Battery Feed
.
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
When the camper-wiring harness is ordered without the
heavy-duty trailering package, an eight-wire harness
with a seven-pin connector is located at the rear of the
vehicle and is tied to the vehicle's frame.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as
part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are
for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires behind the steering column for
the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the
following wires:
Auxiliary Battery
The auxiliary battery provision can be used to supply
electrical power to additional equipment that may be
added, such as a slide-in camper. If the vehicle has this
provision, this relay will be located on the drivers side of
the vehicle, next to the underhood electrical center.
Be sure to follow the proper installation instructions that
are included with any electrical equipment that is
installed.
.
Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector
.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in use
and do not use equipment that exceeds the
maximum amperage rating for the auxiliary battery
provision.
Red/Black: Battery
.
Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
.
White: Ground
It should be installed by your dealer or a qualified
service center.
If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts
exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an
aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed, the ITBC
must be disconnected. Do not power both ITBC and
aftermarket controllers to control the trailer brakes at the
same time.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Overheated Engine Protection
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Engine Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Windshield Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Engine Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Noise Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . 6-106
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-110
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Tire Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Tire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Tire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-112
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-114
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . 6-118
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-119
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . 6-121
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-122
and Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-115
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non‐dealer/non‐retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer. You will
receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer and ask
for GM Accessories, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 2‑92.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING:
{
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many
fluids, and some component wear by-products contain
and/or emit these chemicals.
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
.
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 8‑16.
Doing Your Own Service Work
If this vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑92.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
Maintenance Record on page 7‑17.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to ensure
gasoline meets enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list of marketers
providing TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
Fuel
For diesel engine vehicles, see “Diesel Fuel
Requirements and Fuel System” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel manual.
For vehicles with gasoline engines, please read this.
Gasoline
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑117.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 5.3LV8 engine (VIN Code 0), the
5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2LV8 engine (VIN Code 2), you
can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑9. In all other gasoline
engines, use only unleaded gasoline. See Gasoline
Octane on page 6‑7.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine (VIN Code 2), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You can also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but the vehicle's
acceleration could be slightly reduced, and a slight
audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard. If the octane is less than 87, you
might notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could
damage the engine. If heavy knocking is heard when
using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
Gasoline Octane
For all vehicles except those with the 6.2L V8 engine
(VIN Code 2), use regular unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating
is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly
referred to as spark knock, might be heard when
driving. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane
or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is
heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher,
the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/
CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use of gasolines containing
MMT. See Additives on page 6‑8 for additional
information.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Fuel
Additives
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, the vehicle will
operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp could
turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog‐check test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑41. If this
occurs, return to your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves,
look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also, your dealer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit‐related problems.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle's engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 6‑117.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for those
fuels.
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0), the
5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2), you can
use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing
up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Fuel on page 6‑6. In all
other engines, use only the unleaded gasoline
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
described under Gasoline Octane on page 6‑7.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0),
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), the 6.0L V8 engine
(VIN Code J), or the 6.2L V8 engine (Code 2) can use
85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use of
E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol
in E85 is a “renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from
renewable sources such as corn and other crops.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel
(E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy
has an alternative fuels website (www.eere.energy.gov/
afdc/infrastructure/locator.html) that can help you find
E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have
a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if
the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 0°C (32°F), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best not
to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85.
If you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add
as much fuel as possible — do not add less than
11 L (three gallons) when refueling. You should drive
the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 11 km
(seven miles) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the
change in ethanol concentration.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you
will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using
E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the
Tank on page 6‑11.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85
fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not
add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Filling the Tank
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX Diesel engine, see the
DURAMAX Diesel manual for more information.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
WARNING:
{
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
If the vehicle is a dual fuel tank chassis cab model, and
it runs out of fuel, refuel the front fuel tank first to ensure
a quick restart.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 6‑113.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and state
that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
(85% Ethanol) on page 6‑9.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is fully
installed. The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This
would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 4‑41.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages on
page 4‑63 for more information.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
{
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
.
Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling is
complete.
page 4‑41
.
.
Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
.
Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under
the Hood
WARNING:
{
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
WARNING:
{
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the left of the
brake pedal.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release. This is located under the
hood, near the center of the grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open
to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of the
hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close
the hood.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Compartment Overview
If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or an Allison Transmission, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
5.3 L V8 Engine (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine, 6.0 L V8 Engine and 6.2 L V8 Engine similar):
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑21.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 6‑18.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See
Cooling System on page 6‑29.
I. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on
page 6‑29
.
C. Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 6‑44
.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 6‑37.
D. Battery on page 6‑43.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
Fluid” under Brakes on page 6‑39.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 6‑18.
L. Underhood Fuse Block on page 6‑122.
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission
Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑23 or
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑26.
M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid on
page 6‑38
.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View). See
Jump Starting on page 6‑44.
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
Engine Oil
For diesel engine vehicles, see “Engine Oil” in the
DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16 for the
location of the engine oil dipstick.
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of
the dipstick, add at least one liter/quart of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst
symbol
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑16
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
.
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM6094M.
Cold Temperature Operation
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −29°C (−20°F), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine Oil
to Use” for more information.
.
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
might not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. For vehicles without the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message, an oil change
is needed when the OIL LIFE REMAINING percentage
is near 0%. Your dealer has trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine parts and reset the
system. It is also important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 miles) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on,
reset the system.
On some vehicles, when the system has calculated that
oil life has been diminished, a CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message comes on to indicate that an oil
change is necessary. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑63. Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 miles). It is possible that,
if driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil
Life System on most vehicles:
If the vehicle has a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message and it comes back on when the vehicle is
started and/or the OIL LIFE REMAINING is near 0%,
the Engine Oil Life System has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑56.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer's
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset
as follows:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within five seconds.
3. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
If the display shows 100%, the system is reset.
See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and
Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑56.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Pickup Models”
under “Engine Air Cleaner/Filter” in the DURAMAX®
Diesel Supplement for the correct inspection and
replacement procedures.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16 for
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3 for more information.
If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at
each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is
removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt.
If the engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a
new filter is required. Never use compressed air to
clean the filter.
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly . See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 6‑16.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the
housing and lift up the cover.
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not drive with the
air cleaner/filter off.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission)
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little
dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3 and be sure to
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑13.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 24 km
(15 miles) when outside temperatures are above 10°C
(50°F). If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), drive the vehicle
in 3 (Third) until the engine temperature gauge moves
and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealer service
department.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine run
at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are 10°C
(50°F) or more. If it is colder than 10°C (50°F), you may
have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be
low during this cold check, you must check the fluid hot
before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot will give you
a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Checking the Fluid Level
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
.
When outside temperatures are above
32°C (90°F).
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in P (Park).
.
At high speed for quite a while.
.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the
shift lever in P (Park).
.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 82°C to 93°C
(180°F to 200°F).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes
or more.
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
1. Locate the
transmission dipstick
handle with this
graphic which is
located at the rear of
the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information on location.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD
area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold
check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a
hot check. Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed
down to get an accurate reading.
2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
5. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper
fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer.
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission)
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑13.
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick
tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is
hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid
level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring
the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not
take much fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do
not overfill.
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission.
If you suspect a small leak, then use the following
checking procedures to check the fluid level. However,
if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have
the vehicle towed to a dealer service department and
have it repaired before driving the vehicle further.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by the vehicle's warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑13.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑13.
.
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
Maintenance Schedule. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3. Be sure to use the transmission fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
.
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
page 7‑13
.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage the
transmission. Too much can mean that some of the
fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or
exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid
could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure
to get an accurate reading if checking the
transmission fluid.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely
until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot
check procedure is the most accurate method to check
the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure at the
first opportunity. Use this cold check procedure to check
fluid level when the transmission temperature is
between 27°C and 32°C (80°F and 90°F).
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as
follows:
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
P (Park).
1. Locate the
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the shift
lever back to P (Park).
transmission dipstick at
the rear of the engine
compartment, on the
passenger side of the
vehicle.
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
71°C and 93°C (160°F and 200°F).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the
first opportunity in order to verify the cold check. The
fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it is
important to ensure the transmission temperature is
within range.
1. Locate the
transmission dipstick
at the rear of the
engine compartment,
on the passenger side
of the vehicle.
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the COLD band. It does not take much
fluid, generally less than 0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not
overfill.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16
for more information.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after
the transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 71°C to 93°C
(160°F to 200°F).
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push
the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency
(repeatable readings) is important to maintaining proper
fluid level. If readings are still inconsistent, contact your
dealer.
Cooling System
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The Cooling System allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within
the HOT band, and the transmission temperature
is between 71°C and 93°C (160°F and 200°F), add
or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into
the HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band.
It does not take much fluid, generally less than
0.5 Liter (1 Pint). Do not overfill.
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
An electric engine cooling fan can start even
when the engine is not running. To avoid injury,
always keep hands, clothing, and tools away from
any engine cooling fan.
WARNING:
{
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
5.3 L V8 Engine (4.3 L V6 Engine, 4.8 L V6 Engine,
6.0 L V8 engine and 6.2 L V8 Engine similar)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 miles)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
What to Use
WARNING:
{
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper
coolant mixture will. The vehicle's coolant warning
system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Overheating on page 6‑34.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
outside temperature.
.
Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
.
Protects against rust and corrosion.
.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
.
Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The
repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the
coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is
cool before this is done.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be
damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine
coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑13 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16 for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak in the
cooling system.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge
tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
If the vehicle has a low coolant sensor and the LOW
COOLANT LEVEL message comes on and stays on, it
means you are low on engine coolant. See “LOW
COOLANT LEVEL” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 4‑63
.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank for Gasoline Engines
WARNING:
{
If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see “Cooling System”
in the DURAMAX® Diesel Supplement for the proper
coolant fill procedure.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the coolant surge
tank pressure cap — even a little — they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system
and coolant surge tank pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
WARNING:
{
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
1. Remove the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling
system, including the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap and
WARNING:
{
upper radiator hose, is
no longer hot.
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that
to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge
tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
You will find a coolant temperature gauge on the
vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge on page 4‑40.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the FULL COLD mark.
In addition, you will find ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED messages in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4‑63.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until the engine coolant
temperature gauge indicates approximately
195°F (90°C).
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on page 8‑7.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If you do decide to lift the hood , make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
WARNING:
{
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run the
engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged. The
costly repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode on page 6‑36 for information on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 6‑36 for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the temperature overheat gauge is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
five minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
.
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
.
Stop after high-speed driving.
.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 5‑51.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
or the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed, an
overheat protection mode which alternates firing groups
of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a loss in power and engine performance.
This operating mode allows the vehicle to be driven to a
safe place in an emergency. Driving extended
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. If you are stopped in a traffic jam, apply the brake,
shift to N (Neutral); otherwise, shift to the highest
gear while driving — D (Drive) or 3 (Third).
miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat
protection mode should be avoided.
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil on
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high
outside temperatures, or if you are operating the air
conditioning system, the fans may change to high
speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise. This
is normal and indicates that the cooling system is
functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
page 6‑18
.
Engine Fan Noise
Power Steering Fluid
If the vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan, when
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the fan is spinning slower and the clutch is
not fully engaged. This improves fuel economy and
reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer
towing, and/or high outside temperatures, the fan speed
increases as the clutch more fully engages, so you may
hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and should
not be mistaken as the transmission slipping or making
extra shifts. It is merely the cooling system functioning
properly. The fan will slow down when additional cooling
is not required and the clutch disengages.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 6‑16
for reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing
in an area where the temperature may fall below
freezing.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
Adding Washer Fluid
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The
message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW
ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to add
washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up
to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7‑13
Always use the proper fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the tank
is full. See Engine
.
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑16 for
reservoir location.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the
vehicle's warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑13
.
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Brakes
.
When using concentrated washer fluid,
Brake Fluid
follow the manufacturer's instructions for
adding water.
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 6‑16 for the
.
Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage the washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system. Also, water does
not clean as well as washer fluid.
location of the reservoir.
.
.
Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
windshield washer. It can damage the
vehicle's windshield washer system and
paint.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down because of
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes back up.
.
A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or
later the brakes will not work well.
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to see if
there is a leak.
WARNING:
{
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system. See
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed
container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
on page 7‑3
.
page 7‑13
.
Checking Brake Fluid
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt
from entering the reservoir.
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16.
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Wear
This vehicle has front disc brakes and could have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
WARNING:
{
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come
and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving,
except when applying the brake pedal firmly.
Notice:
.
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake hydraulic system parts. For example,
just a few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake hydraulic system
can damage brake hydraulic system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do
not let someone put in the wrong kind of
fluid.
WARNING:
{
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to
an accident. When the brake wear warning sound
is heard, have the vehicle serviced.
.
If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle's
painted surfaces, the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle on
page 6‑113
.
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change
in many other ways if the wrong replacement brake
parts are installed.
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
heard, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Rear brake drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are removed for rotation or
changing. Drum brakes have an inspection hole to
inspect lining wear during scheduled maintenance.
When the front brake pads are replaced, have the rear
brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign that brake service might be
required.
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
If the vehicle is a Two‐mode Hybrid, see the Two‐mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
WARNING:
{
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery (or
batteries). Refer to the replacement number on the
original battery label when a new battery is needed.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16 for
battery location.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6‑44 for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
DANGER:
{
Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative (−) cable
from the battery to keep the battery from running down.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Extended Storage: Remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
Notice: If the other vehicle's system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. If you have a vehicle with a diesel engine with two
batteries, you should know before you begin that,
especially in cold weather, you may not be able to
get enough power from a single battery in another
vehicle to start your diesel engine. If your vehicle
has more than one battery, using the battery that is
closer to the starter will reduce electrical
WARNING:
{
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
.
They contain acid that can burn you.
resistance. This is located on the passenger side,
in the rear of the engine compartment.
.
They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
.
They contain enough electricity to burn you.
3. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not
touching each other. If they are, it could cause an
unwanted ground connection. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by
the warranty.
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If you
have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in Neutral.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
4. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets.
Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not
needed. This will avoid sparks and help save both
batteries. And it could save the radio!
The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud located
on the right front passenger side of the engine,
where the negative battery cable attaches. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 6‑16.
5. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
The positive (+) terminal, is located under a red
plastic cover at the positive battery post. To
uncover the positive (+) terminal, open the red
plastic cover.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
WARNING: (Continued)
{
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Using an open flame near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
(Continued)
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step.
10. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the
remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
11. Start the vehicle with the good battery and run the
engine for a while.
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
12. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5.3L engine (4.3L, 4.8L,
6.0L and 6.2L similar)
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the
correct order, making sure that the cables do not
touch each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover, to its original
position.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Jumper Cable Removal
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in
the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking
the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because
fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not
drained back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading
taken five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will
appear to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that
has been stationary for an hour or two. Remember that
the rear axle assembly must be supported to get a true
reading.
How to Check Lubricant
All Other Series and Engines
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
.
For all 4.3L, 4.8L and 5.3L 1500 Series
applications, the proper level is 0.04 inches to
0.75 inches (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom
of the filler hole, located on the rear axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
.
For all 6.0L and 6.2L 1500 Series applications, the
proper level is from 0.6 inches to 1.6 inches
(15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
2500HD with 6.0L and 6.2L
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
For all 6.0L and 6.2L 2500HD Series applications,
the proper level is from 0 to 0.5 inches (0 mm to
13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to
reach the proper level.
How to Check Lubricant
For all 6.6L DURAMAX DIESEL 2500HD Series
applications and all 3500 Series applications, the
proper level is from 0.6 inches to 0.8 inches
(17 mm to 21 mm) below the bottom of the filler
plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only
enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑13.
Electric Shift Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive
A. Fill Plug
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles.
B. Drain Plug
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Shift Transfer Case
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you will need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to
overtighten the plug.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 7‑3.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑13.
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑13.
Noise Control System
Tampering with Noise Control
System Prohibited
The following information relates to compliance with
federal noise emission standards for vehicles with a
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) of more than
10,000 lbs (4 536 kg). The Maintenance Schedule
provides information on maintaining the noise control
system to minimize degradation of the noise emission
control system during the life of your vehicle. The noise
control system warranty is given in your warranty
booklet.
All except 1500 Series
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
.
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
These standards apply only to vehicles sold in the
United States.
.
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof:
Air Intake:
.
Removal of the air cleaner silencer.
1. The removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance,
repair or replacement, of any device or element of
design incorporated into any new vehicle for the
purpose of noise control, prior to its sale or delivery
to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use; or
.
Modification of the air cleaner.
Exhaust:
.
Removal of the muffler and/or resonator.
.
Removal of the exhaust pipes and exhaust pipe
clamps.
2. The use of the vehicle after such device or element
of design has been removed or rendered
inoperative by any person.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the acts listed below.
Insulation:
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment can
be necessary.
.
Removal of the noise shields or any underhood
insulation.
Engine:
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to
be adjusted.
.
Removal or rendering engine speed governor,
if the vehicle has one, inoperative so as to allow
engine speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described.
Fan and Drive:
.
Removal of fan clutch, if the vehicle has one,
or rendering clutch inoperative.
.
Removal of the fan shroud, if the vehicle has one.
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
To adjust the vertical aim:
.
Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑15
a light colored wall.
for more information.
.
Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
.
.
.
Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
Be fully assembled and all other work stopped
while headlamp aiming is being performed.
.
Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
.
.
Have tires properly inflated.
Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle's low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low‐beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low‐beam headlamp.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
E8 Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to
be seen on the flat surface.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Halogen Bulbs
WARNING:
{
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
Headlamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the
correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B)
shows the incorrect headlamp aim.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6‑15
for more information.
2. If you are replacing the bulb on the passenger side
remove the Engine Air Cleaner cover. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑21 for more
information.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
3. Reach in and access the bulb sockets from inside
the engine compartment.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 6‑62.
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) and Cargo Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the headlamp assembly and pull it
straight out.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
5. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb
by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.
6. Replace it with a new bulb socket.
7. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb
socket.
8. Reinstall the new bulb socket into the headlamp
assembly and turn it clockwise to secure.
9. Close the hood.
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pickup Box Identification and
Fender Marker Lamps
To replace a pickup box identification or fender marker
lamp bulb:
1. Press the tab from the back to remove the lamp.
2. Unplug the lamp assembly harness.
3. Gently pry the individual lamp from the lamp
assembly.
4. Unplug the lamp.
5. Plug in a new lamp and snap it into the assembly.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly.
A. Cargo Lamp
B. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb (CHMSL)
2. Remove the bulbs by turning socket
counterclockwise and pulling the bulb straight out.
3. Install the bulbs by pushing the bulb straight in and
turning clockwise.
4. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the tailgate. Tailgate on page 3‑12 for more
information.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate latch
strikerpost and pull out
the lamp assembly.
Dual Tire Models
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
4. Press the tab, if the vehicle has one, and turn the
bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the
taillamp assembly.
3. Determine which of the following taillamp
assemblies applies to your vehicle.
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps (Chassis Cab Models)
All Other Models
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp
A. Backup Lamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
6. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the
socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the four screws.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
2. Lift the lens off the lamp assembly.
3. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise and pull the it
straight out from the socket.
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Install a new bulb into the socket, turn it clockwise,
and press it in until it is tight.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
3047 or 921
1156
5. Reinstall the lens and the four screws.
Back-up Lamp*
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
Cargo Lamp and Center
High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
Fender Marker Lamp
High-Beam Headlamp
Low-Beam Headlamp
License Plate Lamp
W5WLL
9005
H11
168
Sidemarker Lamp/Stoplamp/Taillamp/
Turn Signal Lamp
3047
1157
Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp*
* Chassis Cab Models
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb socket out of the connector.
3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb
socket.
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. Here is how to remove the
wiper blade:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 7‑15.
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade and turn the blade assembly away from the
arm connector.
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and
where to obtain service, see your vehicle
Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer.
should be checked when your vehicle's
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑73
.
.
.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
CAUTION:
{
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire's tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle's tires have been damaged,
replace them.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
.
Overloading your vehicle's tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
20‐Inch Tires
Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
If your vehicle has the optional 20‐inch P275/
55R20 size tires, they are classified as touring
tires and are designed for on road use. The low‐
profile, wide tread design is not recommended for
“off‐road” driving or commercial uses such as
snow plowing. See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑11
and Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on
page 5‑37 for additional information.
.
Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
(Continued)
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the vehicle has low‐profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P‐Metric and a LT‐Metric tire sidewall.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information,
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑85
.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73 and
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date
the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended tire
pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high
as it is wide.
and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter B means belted‐bias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire
(A) Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size
means a light truck tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Load Range : Load Range.
(G) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load index and speed rating of a tire.
If two numbers are given as in the example, 120/
116, then this represents the load index for single
versus dual wheel usage (single/dual). The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit number that
indicates the tire height‐to‐width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT‐Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
page 6‑73
.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and
date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire's height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
front axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
6-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑29
.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The
side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/
or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same moldings on the other sidewall of
the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73 and Loading
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
the Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
6-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire's
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Tire Quality Grading on page 6‑85
.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle's capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑82
.
Vehicle on page 5‑29
.
6-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle's original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under‐
inflation or over‐inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under‐
inflation), you can get the following:
.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29 . How you load
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
Too much flexing
.
Too much heat
.
Tire overloading
.
Premature or irregular wear
.
Poor handling
.
Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
If your tires have too much air (over‐inflation),
you can get the following:
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
tire, if your vehicle has one. See Spare Tire on
page 6‑109 for additional information.
.
Unusual wear
.
Poor handling
.
Rough ride
.
Needless damage from road hazards
6-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High-Speed Operation
WARNING:
Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check
tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they're
underinflated. Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
{
Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h (100 mph) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes excessive
heat build up and can cause sudden tire failure.
You could have a crash and you or others could
be killed. Some high-speed rated tires require
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits and road conditions
are such that a vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, make sure the tires are rated for high
speed operation, in excellent condition, and set to
the correct cold tire inflation pressure for the
vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended pressure on
the tire and loading information label, no further
adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low,
add air until you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge.
Vehicles with P265/70R17 or P275/55R20 size tires
require inflation pressure adjustment when driving the
vehicle at speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set
the cold tire inflation pressure to 3 psi (20 kPa) above
the recommended cold tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
6-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you end this high‐speed driving, return the tires to
the cold inflation pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑29 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73.
See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73, for
information on proper tire inflation.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Dual Tire Operation
When the vehicle is new, or whenever a wheel, wheel
bolt or wheel nut is replaced, check the wheel nut
torque after 100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and
10 000 km) of driving. For proper torque and wheel nut
tightening information, see Removing the Spare Tire
and Tools on page 6‑92.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
The outer tire on a dual wheel setup generally wears
faster than the inner tire. Your tires will wear more
evenly and last longer if you rotate the tires periodically,
see Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑80. Also
see Scheduled Maintenance on page 7‑3.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under‐inflated.
WARNING:
{
If you operate your vehicle with a tire that is badly
underinflated, the tire can overheat. An
overheated tire can lose air suddenly or catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Be sure all tires
(including the spare) are properly inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under‐inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
6-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Under‐inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and
stopping ability.
See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6‑76 for
additional information.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry Canada
See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8‑18 for
information regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
RSS-210/211 of Industry Canada.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under‐inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start‐ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the vehicle's tires and
transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS will illuminate the
low tire pressure warning
symbol located on the
instrument panel cluster.
6-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and
the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, tire pressure
levels can be viewed by the driver. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation and
displays see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
Buttons) on page 4‑49 or DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons) on page 4‑56 and DIC Warnings
and Messages on page 4‑63.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to
come on are:
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn
off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator
that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
.
One of the road tires has been replaced with the
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑29, for an example of the Tire and
Loading Information label and its location on your
vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6‑73.
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re‐install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
.
The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle's tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once the
TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching
Process” later in this section.
Your vehicle's TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑80 and Tires on page 6‑64.
6-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer
for service.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle's tires or replace one
or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in
the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear
tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer for
service.
Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for
your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying New Tires on
page 6‑83
.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire's air
pressure. If increasing the tire's air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire's sidewall.
Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer for service if the
TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gauge, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/
wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
6-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire's air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which
may take up to 30 seconds to sound, confirms that
the sensor identification code has been matched to
this tire and wheel position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter's LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time for approximately five seconds. The
horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in
relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and
repeat the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
If your vehicle does not have RKE, press the
Driver Information Center (DIC) vehicle information
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and that the
TPMS sensor matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on
the DIC display screen goes off.
button until the PRESS V TO RELEARN TIRE
POSITIONS message displays. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
If your vehicle does not have RKE or DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem located on the
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
instrument panel cluster until the PRESS V TO
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message displays.
The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in
relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
message displays on the DIC screen.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
6-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle's tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
Tires on page 6‑82 for more information.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 7‑3
.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
If your vehicle has single rear wheels and the
tread design for the front tires is the same as the
rear tires, use the rotation pattern shown here
when rotating the tires.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on
page 6‑82 and Wheel Replacement on page 6‑87
.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels, also see
Dual Tire Operation on page 6‑75
.
6-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has dual
rear wheels and the
tread design for the
front tires is different
from the dual rear tires,
always use the correct
rotation pattern shown
here when rotating the
tires.
If your vehicle has dual rear wheels and the tread
design for the front tires is the same as the rear
tires, always use one of the correct rotation
patterns shown here when rotating the tires.
The dual tires are rotated as a pair, and the inside
rear tires become the outside rear tires.
When you install dual wheels, be sure the vent
holes in the inner and outer wheels on each side
are lined up.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 6‑73 and Loading the Vehicle on
page 5‑29
.
6-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
Make sure the spare tire, if your vehicle has one,
is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to
rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, tighten the
cable. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126
.
on page 6‑106
.
WARNING:
{
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later,
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less
of tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑90
.
If your vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS), reset the TPMS sensors after
rotating the tires. See Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation on page 6‑76
.
6-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Buying New Tires
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
.
You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire's rubber.
.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
.
The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all‐season tread design, the
TPC spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 6‑65 for
additional information.
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire,
if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including temperatures,
loading conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance tires will typically
wear out before they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
6-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four (or six if
your vehicle has dual rear wheels). This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep your
vehicle performing most like it did when the tires were
new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect the
braking and handling performance of your vehicle. See
Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 6‑80 for
information on proper tire rotation.
WARNING:
{
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
WARNING:
{
If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are
the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias‐belted tires) as your
vehicle's original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types (radial and
bias-belted tires) the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could have a crash. Using
tires of different sizes, brands, or types may
also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure
to use the correct size, brand, and type of
tires on your vehicle's wheels.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if
non‐TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non‐TPC Spec rated tires may give a low‐pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 6‑75.
Your vehicle's original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
Vehicle on page 5‑29, for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information label and its location on
your vehicle.
6-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as anti‐lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
WARNING:
{
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not recommended
for those wheels are selected. You may increase
the chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
See Buying New Tires on page 6‑83 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 6‑4 for additional
information.
6-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal
Safety Requirements In Addition To These
Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
Temperature – A, B, C
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1½) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
6-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the minimum required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as the one it replaces.
necessary on a regular basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or
the other, the alignment might need to be checked.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels might need to be
rebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.
6-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of the wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors
for the vehicle.
Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt or wheel nut is replaced
on a dual wheel setup, check the wheel nut torque after
100, 1,000 and 6,000 miles (160, 1 600 and 10 000 km)
of driving. For proper torque, see “Wheel Nut Torque”
under Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑90 for more
information.
WARNING:
{
Used Replacement Wheels
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
WARNING:
{
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
6-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle does not have dual wheels
and has a tire size other than P265/65R18, P275/
55R20 or LT265/70R17, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use chains that are
the proper size for your tires. Install them on the
tires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on the tires
of the front axle. Tighten them as tightly as possible
with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and
follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. If you
can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow
down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the
wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
Tire Chains
WARNING:
{
If your vehicle has dual wheels or P265/65R18,
P275/55R20 or LT265/70R17 size tires, do not
use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle
because there is not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle without the proper
amount of clearance can cause damage to the
brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The
area damaged by the tire chains could cause you
to lose control of your vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer's
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust, or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not
spin your vehicle's wheels.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
6-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 4‑3
.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, it is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could be badly
injured or killed if the vehicle slips off the jack. If a
jack is provided with the vehicle, only use it for
changing a flat tire.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual transmission to
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
(Continued)
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
6-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement of
wheel blocks (A).
WARNING: (Continued)
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure
the transfer case is in a drive gear – not in
N (Neutral).
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest
away from the one being changed. That would be
the tire on the other side, at the opposite end of
the vehicle.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
6-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Cab
A. Wing Nut Retaining D. Jack
Tool Kit
Crew Cab
E. Jack Knob
A. Wing Nut Retaining D. Jack
B. Tool Kit
Tool Kit
F. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
E. Jack Knob
C. Wheel Blocks
B. Tool Kit
F. Wing Nut Retaining
C. Wheel Blocks
Wheel Blocks
6-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For regular cab models, the equipment you will need is
behind the passenger's seat. For extended and crew
cab models, the equipment is on the shelf behind the
passenger's side second row seat.
1. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to
lower the jack head to release the jack from its
holder.
2. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
3. Remove the wing nut used to retain the storage
bag and tools by turning it counterclockwise.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
Extended Cab
A. Wing Nut Retaining C. Wheel Blocks
Tool Kit
D. Jack
B. Tool Kit
E. Jack Knob
6-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the spare tire
lock (J). To remove the spare tire lock, insert the
ignition key turn and pull straight out.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
A. Spare Tire (Valve
Stem Pointed Down)
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
I. Jack Handle Extensions
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If equipped)
6-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn
the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled
out from under the vehicle.
3. Insert the hoist end
(open end) (F) of the
extension through the
hole (G) in the rear
bumper.
If spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch, if the vehicle has one, may be
engaged causing the tire not to lower. See
Secondary Latch System on page 6‑103.
Do not use the
chiseled end of the
wheel wrench.
5. Use the wheel wrench
hook which allows you
to pull the hoist cable
towards you to assist in
reaching the spare tire.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension (F) connects
to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
6-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin,
tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the
wheel along with the cable and guide latch.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
6. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in
the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer.
Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding
the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the
latch.
6-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If your vehicle has
wheel nut caps, loosen
them by turning the
wheel wrench
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
counterclockwise.
If the vehicle has a center cap with wheel nut caps,
the wheel nut caps are designed to stay with the
center cap after they are loosened. Remove the
entire center cap.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
Changing a Flat Tire on page 6‑90 for more
information.
6-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the wheel has a smooth center cap, place the
chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the
wheel, and gently pry it out.
3. Use the wheel wrench and turn it counterclockwise
to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel
nuts yet.
6-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position - 1500
Models
Front Position - All Other
Models
Rear Position – 1500
Rear Position – All Other
Models
Models
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. If the
flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (1500 Model
vehicles), position the jack under the bracket
attached to the vehicle's frame, behind the flat tire.
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle (all other
models), position the jack on the frame behind the
flat tire.
5. If the flat tire is on the rear, for 1500 models
position the jack under the rear axle about 2 inches
(5 cm) inboard of the shock absorber bracket; for
all other models, position the jack under the rear
axle between the spring anchor and the shock
absorber bracket.
If you have added a snow plow to the front of your
vehicle, lower the snow plow fully before raising
the vehicle.
6-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make sure that the jack head is positioned so that
the rear axle is resting securely between the
grooves that are on the jack head.
7. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
WARNING:
{
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack
lift head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
6. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the spare tire
to fit under the wheel well.
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on
page 6‑90
.
6-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
WARNING:
{
If wheel studs are damaged, they can break. If all
the studs on a wheel broke, the wheel could come
off and cause a crash. If any stud is damaged
because of a loose-running wheel, it could be that
all of the studs are damaged. To be sure, replace
all studs on the wheel. If the stud holes in a wheel
have become larger, the wheel could collapse in
operation. Replace any wheel if its stud holes
have become larger or distorted in any way.
Inspect hubs and hub‐piloted wheels for damage.
Because of loose running wheels, piloting pad
damage may occur and require replacement of
the entire hub, for proper centering of the wheels.
When replacing studs, hubs, wheel nuts or
wheels, be sure to use GM original equipment
parts.
9. Install the spare tire.
WARNING:
{
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel.
11. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel is
held against the hub.
12. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
6-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose
or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened
with a torque wrench to the proper torque
specification after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the aftermarket
manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑126 for original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
13. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
Have a technician check the wheel nut tightness of all
wheels with a torque wrench after the first 100 miles
(160 km) and then 1,000 miles (1600 km) after that.
Repeat this service whenever you have a tire removed
or serviced. See Capacities and Specifications on
page 6‑126 for more information.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑126 for the wheel nut torque
specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall either the center cap, or bolt-on hub cap,
depending on what your vehicle is equipped with. For
center caps, place the cap on the wheel and tap it into
place until it seats flush with the wheel. The cap only
6-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
goes on one way. Be sure to line up the tab on the
center cap with the indentation on the wheel. For
bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic nut caps with the
wheel nuts and then tighten by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed to
Step 6.
Secondary Latch System
This vehicle may have an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off
your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare
must be installed with the valve stem pointing down.
See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑106
.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
WARNING:
{
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow
the instructions listed next.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on
page 6‑92
.
6-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
6-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING:
{
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using the
hoist assembly until it has been inspected and/or
replaced.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the
cable.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑97.
6-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
WARNING:
{
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as
soon as possible.
A. Flat or Spare
Tire (Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
I. Jack Handle Extensions
D. Tire/Wheel Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
J. Spare Tire Lock
(If Equipped)
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
6-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D) from the guide
pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel.
Tilt the retainer down and through the center wheel
opening.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together, as shown.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G) in
the rear bumper and
onto the hoist shaft.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the
underside of the wheel.
Do not use the
chiseled end of the
wheel wrench.
6-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
To store the jack and jack tools:
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until
you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
A. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
E. Tool Bag
F. Jack Mounting Bracket
G. Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut Retaining
Tool Kit
H. Bolt Retaining Wheel
Blocks
D. Wheel Wrench and
Extensions
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire
moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
1. Put the tools (D) in the tool bag (E) and place them
in the retaining bracket (C).
2. Tighten down the wing nut (C).
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock, if the vehicle has one.
6-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (B) and jack (G)
together with the wing nut (A) and retaining
bolt (H).
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have
your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You could
damage the vehicle, and the repair costs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never use four-wheel
drive when the different size spare tire is installed
on the vehicle.
4. Position the jack (G) in the mounting bracket (F).
Position the holes in the base of the jack (G) onto
the pin in the mounting bracket (F).
5. Return them to their original location in the vehicle.
For more information, refer to Removing the Spare
Tire and Tools on page 6‑92 for more information.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires originally installed on your vehicle. This
spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle, so it
is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has four-wheel
drive and the different size spare tire is installed, keep
the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation
pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on
page 6‑73 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29 for
information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or
store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire on page 6‑97 and Storing a
Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 6‑106.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road tire
repaired or replaced as soon as you can and installed
back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire will be
available in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle's original road tires and wheels in
size and type, do not include the spare in the tire
rotation.
6-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
the upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils
should be removed as quickly as possible. The
vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that
could cause stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle's breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning the vehicle's
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening the
vehicle's doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle's
upholstery and clean the vehicle's glass can be
obtained from your dealer.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle's interior.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
.
A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
When cleaning the vehicle's interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
.
.
A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle's
interior surfaces.
Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
6-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
.
.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle's interior.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Fabric/Carpet
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process that
was used with plain water.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any
soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the
soil as possible using one of the following techniques:
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
.
For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper
towel until no more can be removed.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
.
For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
6-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat
to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never use
spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle's interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
WARNING:
{
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
6-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from your dealer. Follow all manufacturers' directions
regarding correct product usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate disposal of any vehicle
care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
page 7‑13
.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Washing Your Vehicle
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle on
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
page 6‑113
.
6-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum.
A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
.
Sand and salt
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
.
.
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper removal
6-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
The vehicle may have either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never drive a
vehicle that has aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
6-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on
the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where
mud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas
of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new
vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer's/retailer's body and paint shop.
6-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the
following information:
Vehicle Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
.
Model designation
.
Paint information
.
Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Electrical System
This legal identifier is in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside. The VIN also
appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts
labels and certificates of title and registration.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and
replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 6‑126 for the
vehicle's engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
6-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 2‑92 and
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
page 2‑92
.
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don't have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the
same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down
period, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
correct amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
6-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block access door is
located on the driver side
edge of the instrument
panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn Signal
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
8
6-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
22
Usage
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
Passenger Door Module, Driver
Unlock
9
23
10
11
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
24
Cooled Seats
Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless
Entry System
25
26
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
12
Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock
Feature)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Driver Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
LT DR
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Harness
Connector
Usage
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power
Liftgate
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
20
21
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Harness Connector
6-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Harness
Connector
Usage
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
Top View
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
SEO/UPFITTER
Harness Connector
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
6-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
If the vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see
the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode
Hybrid manual for more information.
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle.
Fuses
Usage
Lift the cover to access the fuse block.
1
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
Electronic Suspension Control,
Automatic Level Control Exhaust
2
3
4
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
6-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
23
Not Used
5
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
24
6
7
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
25
26
27
28
29
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
8
Oxygen Sensor
9
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
10
11
12
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
30
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
13
14
31
32
33
34
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lights 2
Sunroof
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
35
36
37
38
Windshield Wiper
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Fuel System Control Module
Not Used
6-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
39
Usage
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Fuses
Usage
52
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
40
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
53
41
54
55
SEO Upfitter Usage
42
Audio System
Climate Controls (Ignition)
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
43
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
56
44
45
46
47
48
Not Used
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Power Take-Off
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Cooling Fan 1
57
58
59
60
61
62
Not Used
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition)
Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System
Cooling Fan 2
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
49
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
50
51
Rear Defogger
Heated Mirrors
6-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Not Used
Relays
FAN HI
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
63
64
65
66
67
FAN LO
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
Heated Windshield Washer System
Transfer Case
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power) (Optional - 40A Fuse
Required)
68
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
69
70
71
72
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Not Used
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
REAR DEFOG
RUN/CRANK
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
Rear Defogger
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
Switched Power
6-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 7‑13 for more information.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® Diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer for more information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
4.3L V6 1500 Series
4.8L V8 1500 Series
5.3L V8 1500 Series
6.0L V8 2500 Series and 3500 Series
6.2L V8 1500 Series
Engine Oil with Filter
4.3L V6
16.5 qt
16.9 qt
16.9 qt
16.4 qt
16.8 qt
15.6 L
16.0 L
16.0 L
15.5 L
15.9 L
4.5 qt
6.0 qt
4.3 L
5.7 L
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8
6-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Fuel Tank
1500 Series Standard and Short Box
1500 Series Long Box
26.0 gal
34.0 gal
26.0 gal
34.0 gal
50.0 gal
27.0 gal
23.0 gal
98.0 L
128.7 L
98.0 L
2500 Series Standard Box
2500 Series and 3500 Series Long Box
3500 Series Chassis Cab
128.7 L
189.0 L
102.0 L
87.0 L
3500 Chassis Cab – Front Tank
3500 Chassis Cab – Rear Tank (if equipped)
Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement)
Auto 4-Speed Transmission 4L60-E Electronic Transmission
Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L80-E
Auto 6-Speed Transmission 6L90-E
Auto 6-Speed Transmission Allison
Transfer Case Fluid
5.0 qt
6.0 qt
4.7 L
5.7 L
6.3 qt
6.0 L
7.4 qt
7.0 L
1.6 qt
1.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 ft lb
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual.
Recheck fluid level after filling.
6-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
4.3L V6 (LU3)
VIN Code
Transmission
Automatic
Spark Plug Gap
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
X
A
4.8L V8 (L20)
Automatic
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active
Fuel Management™ (Iron
Block) (LMG)
0
3
Automatic
Automatic
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active
Fuel Management™(Aluminum
Block) (LC9)
6.0L V8 (Iron Block) (L96 or LY6)
G or K
2
Automatic
Automatic
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
0.040 in (1.02 mm)
6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel (Aluminum
Block) (L9H)
6-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The maintenance schedule is for vehicles that:
Maintenance Schedule
.
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
See Loading the Vehicle on page 5‑29.
Introduction
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. For diesel engine vehicles, see the
maintenance schedule section in the DURAMAX Diesel
manual.
.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
.
are driven off‐road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 5‑11.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 6‑7
.
WARNING:
{
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the
scheduled maintenance in this section. We recommend
having your dealer perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good
working condition, improves fuel economy, and reduces
vehicle emissions for better air quality.
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Own Service Work on page 6‑5.
Because of all the different ways people use vehicles,
maintenance needs vary. The vehicle might need more
frequent checks and services. Please read the
information under Scheduled Maintenance. To keep the
vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At your dealer, you can be certain that you will receive
the highest level of service available. Your dealer has
specially trained service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as, up to date tools and
equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics.
indicate the need for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must be changed at least
once a year and the oil life system must be reset. Your
dealer has trained service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system. If the engine oil life
system is reset accidentally, service the vehicle within
5 000 km/3,000 miles since the last service. Reset the
oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine
Oil Life System on page 6‑20.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 7‑13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 7‑15. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
The services described for Maintenance I should be
performed at every engine oil change. The services
described for Maintenance II should be
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and performance of the
vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for
new tires be performed when they have 8 000 to
13 000 km (5,000 to 8,000 miles). See Tire Inspection
and Rotation on page 6‑80.
performed when:
.
Maintenance I was performed the last time the
engine oil was changed.
.
It has been 10 months or more since the Change
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since
the last service.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon
Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
page 6‑18. An Emission Control Service.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as soon as possible,
within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system might not
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
.
.
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on
Perform all services described in Maintenance I.
page 6‑18. An Emission Control Service.
.
Steering and suspension inspection. Visual
.
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
inspection for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
on page 6‑31
.
signs of wear.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑38.
Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage,
and parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball
joints on 2500/3500 series vehicles require
lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their
temperature is −12°C (10°F) or higher, or they
could be damaged. Control arm ball joints on
1500 series vehicles are maintenance‐free.
Vehicles used under severe commercial operating
conditions require lubrication on a regular basis
every 5 000 km/3,000 miles.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑73
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑80.
Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 6‑80
.
Fluids visual leak check (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first). A leak in any system must
be repaired and the fluid level checked.
.
Engine cooling system inspection. Visual
inspection of hoses, pipes, fittings, and clamps and
replacement, if needed.
.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven
in dusty conditions only). See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 6‑21.
.
Windshield wiper blade inspection for wear,
cracking, or contamination and windshield and
wiper blade cleaning, if contaminated. See
Windshield and Wiper Blades on page 6‑114. Worn
or damaged wiper blade replacement. See
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on
.
.
Brake system inspection (or every 12 months,
whichever occurs first).
For vehicles with Allison Transmission® only: At
the first engine oil change only, replace external
transmission filter.
page 6‑63
.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders,
folding seat hardware, and tailgate hinges, linkage,
and handle pivot points lubrication. See
Additional Required Services
At the First 160 km/100 Miles,
1 600 km/1,000 Miles, and
10 000 km/6,000 Miles
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 7‑13. More frequent lubrication may be
required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on
weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
.
For vehicles with dual wheels: Check dual wheel
nut torque. For proper torque, see Capacities and
Specifications on page 6‑126.
.
.
Restraint system component check. See Checking
the Restraint Systems on page 2‑94.
At Each Fuel Stop
.
Engine oil level check. See Engine Oil on
Automatic transmission fluid level check and
adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑23 or Automatic Transmission Fluid
(6-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑26.
page 6‑18
Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant
on page 6‑31
.
.
.
.
Windshield washer fluid level check. See
.
.
.
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 6‑38.
Four‐wheel drive vehicles: Transfer case fluid level
check and adding fluid, if needed.
Once a Month
Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑21.
.
Tire inflation check. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 6‑73
.
Vehicles with diesel engine or GVWR above
4 536 kg (10,000 lbs) only: Shields inspection for
damage or looseness. Adjust or replace as
required. This is a Noise Emission Control Service.
Applicable to vehicles sold in the United States
and recommended for vehicles sold in Canada.
.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 6‑80.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once a Year
First Engine Oil Change After Every
40 000 km/25,000 Miles
.
Starter switch check. See Owner Checks and
.
Services on page 7‑11.
Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks.
.
.
.
Parking brake and automatic transmission P (Park)
mechanism check. See Owner Checks and
Services on page 7‑11.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
(extreme duty service) for vehicles mainly driven
off‐road in four‐wheel drive. Vehicles used for
farming, mining, forestry, Department of Natural
Resources (DNR), and snow plowing occupations
meet this definition. Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be
sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water
can overcome the seals and contaminate the
transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
Automatic transmission shiftlock control system
check. See Owner Checks and Services on
page 7‑11
.
.
.
Ignition transmission lock check. See Owner
Checks and Services on page 7‑11.
Engine cooling system and pressure cap pressure
check. Radiator and air conditioning condenser
outside cleaning. See Cooling System on
page 6‑29
.
.
.
Exhaust system and nearby heat shields
inspection for loose or damaged components.
Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort,
or binding. Replace if needed.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water
can overcome the seals and contaminate the
transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
80 000 km/50,000 Miles
.
Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6‑21.
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (severe
service) for vehicles with Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) over 3 901 kg (8,600 lbs) or mainly
driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather, in hilly or
mountainous terrain, when frequently towing a
trailer, or used for taxi, police, or delivery service.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑23 or Automatic
.
Evaporative control system inspection. Check all
fuel and vapor lines and hoses for proper hook‐up,
routing, and condition. Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works properly. Replace as
needed. An Emission Control Service. The U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency or the California
Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not
nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the vehicle's useful life.
We, however, urge that all recommended
maintenance services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the maintenance be
recorded.
Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) on
page 6‑26
.
.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
(severe service) for vehicles mainly driven when
frequently towing a trailer, or used for taxi, police,
or delivery service. Check vent hose at transfer
case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be
sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
First Engine Oil Change After Every
160 000 km/100,000 Miles
First Engine Oil Change After Every
240 000 km/150,000 Miles
.
.
Automatic transmission fluid change (normal
Engine cooling system drain, flush, and refill,
service). See Automatic Transmission Fluid
(4-Speed Transmission) on page 6‑23 or
Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed
Transmission) on page 6‑26.
cooling system and cap pressure check, and
cleaning of outside of radiator and air conditioning
condenser (or every 5 years, whichever occurs
first). See Engine Coolant on page 6‑31. An
Emission Control Service.
.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change
.
(normal service). Check vent hose at transfer case
for kinks and proper installation. Check to be sure
vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of
debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer
is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody,
care should be taken to not directly spray the
transfer case output seals. High pressure water
can overcome the seals and contaminate the
transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will
decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
Engine accessory drive belt inspection for fraying,
excessive cracks, or obvious damage and
replacement, if needed. An Emission Control
Service.
.
Spark plug replacement and spark plug wires
inspection. An Emission Control Service.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system.
Engine coolant level check.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Windshield washer fluid level check.
Tire inflation pressures check.
Tire wear inspection.
Rotate tires.
Fluids visual leak check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only).
Brake system inspection.
Allison Transmission® only: External transmission filter replacement (at the first
maintenance service performed on the vehicle only).
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance (cont'd)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Steering and suspension inspection.
Chassis components lubrication.
Engine cooling system inspection.
Windshield wiper blades inspection.
Body components lubrication.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Restraint system components check.
Automatic transmission fluid level check.
Four‐wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid level check.
Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles not driven in dusty conditions).
Shields inspection, vehicles with diesel engine or with GVWR above 4 536 kg
(10,000 lbs) only.
•
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Owner Checks and Services
Starter Switch Check
WARNING:
{
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
brake. See Parking Brake on page 3‑50.
on page 3‑50
.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves
out of P (Park), contact your dealer for service.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
.
To check the parking brake's holding ability: With
.
The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when
the engine running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot pressure from the
regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held
by the parking brake only.
the shift lever is in P (Park).
.
The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
.
To check the P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
Contact your dealer if service is required.
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer if service is required.
WARNING:
{
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once
should the vehicle begin to move.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
This maintenance section applies to vehicles with a
gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/
or an Allison Transmission, see the maintenance
schedule section in the DURAMAX® Diesel manual.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission
Power Steering
System
Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB
or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Floor Shift
Linkage
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for
Engine Oil
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis
Lubrication
on page 6‑18
.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
coolant. See Engine Coolant on
Front Axle (1500 SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
Series) ‐ Four‐ (GM Part No. U.S. 89021671, in
Engine Coolant
page 6‑31
.
Wheel Drive
Canada 89021672).
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in
Canada 89021320).
Front Axle
(1500, 2500 HD,
and 3500 HD
Series)
Hydraulic Brake
System
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678).
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678).
Body Door
Hinge Pins,
Rear Axle
Tailgate Hinge Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
and Linkage, (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Folding Seats, Canada 10953474).
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Transfer Case
(Four‐Wheel
Drive)
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Front Axle
Propshaft Spline
or One-Piece
Propshaft Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
Tailgate Handle
Pivot Points,
Hinges, Latch (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Bolt, and
Linkage
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511).
Canada 10953474).
4‐Speed Auto.
Trans.)
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in
Canada 10953518) or Dielectric
Silicone Grease (GM Part No.
U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Hinges
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX® diesel engine, see the DURAMAX® Diesel manual for more information.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Standard Filter
High Capacity Filter
Oil Filter
15908916*
15908915
A3086C*
A3085C
4.3L V6
25010792
89017524
PF47
PF48
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8
Spark Plugs
4.3L V6
12568387
12621258
25877402
41-101
41-110
—
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8; 6.2L V8
Wiper Blades – 21.6 in (55.0 cm)
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
If your vehicle has the DURAMAX ® Diesel engine, see
V6 Engines
the DURAMAX ® Diesel manual for more information.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont'd)
Serviced By Services Performed
Odometer
Reading
Date
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY)
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors . . . 8-15
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . 8-16
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Radio Frequency Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will
be resolved by the dealer's sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the following
information available to give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
.
Dealership name and location.
.
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer's facility. That
is why we suggest following Step One first.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file
with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court
action, use of the program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do
not agree with the decision given in your case, you may
reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that
you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be
aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/
Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The
program provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in about 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on GM
vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy tools
and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
.
Digital owner manual, warranty information,
.
and more
My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
.
Online service and maintenance records
.
My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM dealers/retailers.
.
Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
.
Exclusive privileges and offers
.
Recall notices for your specific vehicle
OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
.
My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
.
service estimates, check trade-in values,
or schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
Other Helpful Links:
.
My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
.
FAQ
.
Contact Us
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing,
or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the
U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle's eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer
Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users
call 1-800-263-3830.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
Roadside Assistance Program
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1‐800‐CHEV‐USA
(1‐800‐243‐8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1‐888‐889‐2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
.
Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
.
Telephone number of your location
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your
vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift.
.
Location of the vehicle
.
Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
Services Provided
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to the nearest service
station.
Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/
.
Lock‐Out Service: Service is provided to unlock
the vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock
may be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
.
Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
Highway: Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash
and cannot be driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud,
or snow.
.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the claims are made too
often, or the same type of claim is made many times.
Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire,
if equipped, must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's responsibility for
the repair or replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
.
Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 km from where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair orders. Once authorization has
been received, the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help you make arrangements and explain how
to receive payment.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
.
.
.
Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
Legal fines.
Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
.
.
Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not
provided through this service.
.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is
required.
.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer and request an appointment. By scheduling
a service appointment and advising your service
consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can
help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with each
new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/
retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the
following:
If the dealer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day
as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Courtesy Transportation Program
Shuttle Service
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada) and extended powertrain,
and hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and
Canada.
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This
includes one‐way or round trip shuttle service within
reasonable time and distance parameters of the
dealer's area.
8-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer's
shuttle service, the expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer for
specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered by
appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle's resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes,
levies, usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
8-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by that
warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to
ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance,
durability, and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part,
may be an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle's
originally designed appearance and safety performance,
however, the history of these parts is not known. Such
parts are not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be
repaired with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available from your
current insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
8-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
.
.
If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver's name,
the service's name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end
of your lease for poor quality repairs.
Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it
is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you keep
these items in your vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver's license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance
company and policy number, and a general
description of the damage to the other vehicle.
.
Check to make sure that you are all right. If you
are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
.
If there has been an injury, call emergency
services for help. Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been taken care of.
Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to move it by a police
officer.
.
If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/
provinces with “no fault” insurance laws, a report
may not be necessary. This is especially true if
there are no injuries and both vehicles are
driveable.
.
Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
.
If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program on
page 8‑7 for more information.
8-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
.
Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you will
have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay the
full cost.
.
Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
If another party's insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
8-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or
write to:
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying General Motors.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or General Motors.
1-800-333-0510
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
8-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an
order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Owner Information
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
8-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in
this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
.
How various systems in your vehicle were
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
operating
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags in
a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data about
how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may
also retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as
radio pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
.
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
.
How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
.
How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded
by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
8-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM's defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency Statement
If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions in the OnStar Owners Guide for information
on data collection and use.
This vehicle has systems that operate on a radio
frequency that comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with
RSS-210/211 of Industry and Science Canada.
Navigation System
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause interference.
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
8-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
A
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Passenger Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Antenna
Fixed Mast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-147
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Appearance Care
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Active Fuel Management™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment . . . . . . . . 5-37
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 4-21
Airbag
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115
Care of Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Airbag System
Airbag Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
How Does an Airbag Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . 2-80
When Should an Airbag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Interior Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
i - 1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appearance Care (cont.)
B
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Audio System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Audio Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-146
Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-141
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System . . . . . . . . . . .4-147
Audio System(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Automatic Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Automatic Transmission
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Electric Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Run-Down Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
Brake
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Pedal and Adjustable Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-26
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Auxiliary
Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
i - 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) and
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Checking Things Under the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Chemical Paint Spotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Child Restraints
Infants and Young Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat
Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front
Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Securing a Child Restraint in the
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
California
Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Carbon Monoxide
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61, 2-65, 2-70
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-118
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115
Exterior Lamps/Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Fabric/Carpet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-111
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Care of
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
CD, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105, 4-112
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
i - 3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Customer Information
Service Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . 8-16
Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-113
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 4-21
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Climate Control Systems
Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Clock, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Coolant
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Disc, MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105, 4-112
Doing Your Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Door
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Engine Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Courtesy Transportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
i - 4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49, 4-56
DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Driving
E
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
EDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Electrical Equipment, Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-117
Electrical System
At Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Before a Long Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
In Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Driving for Better Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Dual Automatic Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
DVD
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119
Power Windows and Other Power Options . . . . . .6-118
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Windshield Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Electronic Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Electronic Immobilizer Operation
PASS-Key® III+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Check and Service Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Compartment Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Rear Seat Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-132
i - 5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Flat Tire, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-26
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Windshield Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Fog Lamps
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Fan Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36, 6-50
Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Management, Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Fuel Economy
F
Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Finish Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Fixed Mast Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Driving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
i - 6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
H
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-121
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-119
Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-122
Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Pickup Box Identification and Fender Marker
G
Garage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Gasoline
Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Gauges
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18, 4-21
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
High-Speed Operation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
Highbeam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
i - 7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lamps (cont.)
I
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Dome Lamp Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
LATCH System for Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Latches, Seatback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Lighting
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Infants and Young Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Instrument Panel
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Integrated Trailer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-51
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Lights
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Airbag Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Brake System Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Exterior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
K
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Lamps
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
i - 8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights (cont.)
M
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Loading Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Locks
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Lumbar
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Manual Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Outside Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Outside Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Outside Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Outside Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Outside Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105, 4-112
Manual Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Power Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
i - 9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside
N
Convex Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Power Foldaway Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Towing Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode . . . . 6-36
Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Owners, Canadian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Noise Control System, Tampering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
O
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Oil
P
Paint, Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
Park
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Park Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Parking
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
OnStar, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Operation, Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . 3-69
Outlet Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Outlets
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
i - 10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . .6-5
Phone
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Radios
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Pregnancy, Using Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Program
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-146
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
Rear Seat Entertainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-141
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Proposition 65 Warning, California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
i - 11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Recreational Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Replacement Parts
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Replacing Restraint System Parts After a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Running the Vehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
S
Safety Belts
Care of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-112
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Safety Belts Are for Everyone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Seatback Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Seats
Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
i - 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
Shifting
Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Memory, Mirrors and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14, 2-15
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61, 2-65, 2-70
Security
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Sliding Rear Window, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-109
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Specifications and Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
StabiliTrak®
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
Rear Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle . . . 6-6
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Publications Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116
i - 13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
System
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-115
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Changing a Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-116
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Dual Tire Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Inflation - Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Installing the Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76
Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-75
Removing the Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-103
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools . . . . . . . . . . .6-106
Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps . . . . . . 6-60
Tampering with Noise Control System
Prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Content Theft-Deterrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic Immobilizer
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Tilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Time, Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
i - 14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
U
Terminology and Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Towing
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Universal Home Remote System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
V
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Running While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Service Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-117
Ventilation Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Traction
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23, 6-26
Transmission Operation, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Transportation Program, Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Truck-Camper Loading Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Turn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
i - 15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield
W
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Wiper Blades, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-114
Wiper Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-118
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
When It Is Time for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Where to Put the Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Sliding Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
X
XM Radio Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-147
i - 16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|